Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
ZVL
Vector Network Analyzer
Operating Manual
1303.6580.32 08
T
e
s
t
a
n
d
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
M
a
n
u
a
l
The Operating Manual describes all R&S
ZVL models:
- R&S
-
(
=
(
2
1
22 21
12 11
2
1
a
a
S S
S S
b
b
The equation shows that the S-parameters are expressed as S
<out>< in>
, where <out>
and <in> denote the output and input port numbers of the DUT.
Meaning of 2-port S-parameters
The four 2-port S-parameters can be interpreted as follows:
E S
11
isthe input reflection coefficient, defined as the ratio of the wave quantities
b
1
/a
1
, measured at PORT 1 (forward measurement with matched output and a
2
=
0).
E S
21
is the forward transmission coefficient, defined as the ratio of the wave
quantities b
2
/a
1
(forward measurement with matched output and a
2
= 0).
R&S
+
=
The transmission parameters are calculated according to:
( ) , , 2
0 0
0 0
j i Z Z
S
Z Z
Z
j i
ij
j i
ij
= +
=
The converted admittances are defined as the inverse of the impedances.
Example:
Z
11
is the input impedance of a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the
reference impedance Z
0
(matched -circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection
measurement).
Tip: You can also read the converted impedances in a reflection coefficient
measurement from the Smith chart.
3.2.3 Admittance Parameters
An admittance is the complex ratio between a current and a voltage. The analyzer
provides converted admittances: each admittance parameter is obtained from a single
S-parameter.
The converted admittance parameters describe the input admittances of a DUT with
fully matched outputs.The converted admittances are the inverse of the converted
impedances.
The analyzer converts a single measured S-parameter to determine the corresponding
converted admittance. As a result, converted Y-parameters cannot completely describe
general n-port DUTs:
E A reflection parameter Y
ii
completely describes a one-port DUT. For n-port DUTs
(n>1) the reflection parameters Y
ii
describe the input admittances at ports i (i = 1 to
n) under the condition that each of the other ports is terminated with its reference
impedance (matched-circuit parameters).
E A two-port transmission parameter Y
ij
(i S j) can describe a pure serial impedance
between the two ports.
Relation with S-parameters
The converted admittances Y
ii
are calculated from the reflection S-parameters S
ii
according to:
R&S
=
where i numbers the analyzer/DUT port. The transmission parameters are calculated
according to:
( )
99 ..., , 1 , , , / 1
2
0 0 0 0
= = =
+
= j i j i Z
Z Z S Z Z
S
Y
ij
j i ij j i
ij
ij
Example:
Y11 is the input admittance of a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the
reference impedance Z
0
(matched-circuit admittance measured in a forward reflection
measurement).
You can also read the converted admittances in a reflection coefficient measurement
from the inverted Smith chart.
R&S
RF test specification,
including EDR tests.
FSL-K14,
Spectrogram
Measurements
SAN option Spectrogram display and trace recording for general spectrum measurements.
FSL-K30,
Noise Figure and
Gain
Measurements)
SAN option,
measurement mode
Noise figure and noise temperature measurements, especially suited for
manufacturers of amplifiers.
FSL-K72,
WCDMA
Measurements
(3GPP/FDD BTS)
SAN option,
measurement mode
Transmitter (TX) tests on 3GPP/FDD downlink signals including HSDPA and
HSUPA channels.
FSL-K91,
WLAN OFDM
Analysis
SAN option,
measurement mode
Transmitter (TX) tests on WLAN signals in line with the WLAN standards IEEE
802.11a/b/g/j.
FSL-K93,
WiMAX
OFDM/OFDMA
Analysis
SAN option,
measurement mode
Transmitter (TX) tests on WLAN signals in line with standard IEEE 802.16-2004
and IEEE 802.16e-2005 for mobile WiMAX-Signals including WiBro.
The following sections provide a short introduction to the software options.
R&S
2
provide direct insight into the degree of stability or potential instability of linear circuits.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
192
References: Marion Lee Edwards and Jeffrey H. Sinsky, "A New Criterion for Linear 2-Port Stability Using
a Single Geometrically Derived Parameter", IEEE Trans. MTT, vol. 40, No. 12, pp. 2303-2311, Dec. 1992.
Remote
control:
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "KFAC21" |
"MUF121" | "MUF221" | ...
[SENSe<Chn>:]FUNCtion[:ON] "...:POWer:KFACtor | MUFactor1 |
MUFactor2"
Create new trace and select name and measurement parameter:
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "SY11" | "SY12" |
"SY21" | "SY22"
Format
The Format submenu defines how the measured data is presented in the graphical display.
dB Mag selects a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale of the vertical axis to display the
magnitude of a complex measured quantity.
Phase selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of a complex
measured quantity in the range between 180 degrees and +180 degrees.
Smith selects a Smith diagram to display an S-parameter or ratio.
Polar selects a polar diagram to display an S-parameter or ratio.
Group Delay calculates the group delay from an S-parameter or ratio and displays it in a
Cartesian diagram.
Aperture sets a delay aperture for the delay calculation.
SWR calculates the Standing Wave Ratio from the measured reflection S-parameters and
displays it in a Cartesian diagram.
Lin Mag selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear scale of the vertical axis to display the
magnitude of the measured quantity.
Real selects a Cartesian diagram to display the real part of a complex measured quantity.
Imag selects a Cartesian diagram to display the imaginary part of a complex measured quantity.
Inv Smith selects an inverted Smith diagram to display an S-parameter or ratio.
Unwrapped Phase selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of
the measured quantity in an arbitrary phase range.
The Format settings are closely related to the settings in the Scale submenu and in the Display menu. All
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
193
of them have an influence on the way the analyzer presents data on the screen.
The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (Trace
Measure). Nevertheless, in order to extract useful information from the data, it is important to select
a display format which is appropriate to the analysis of a particular measured quantity; see
Measured Quantities and Display Formats.
An extended range of formats is available for markers. To convert any point on a trace, create a
marker and select the appropriate marker format. Marker and trace formats can be applied independently.
dB Mag
Selects a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale of the vertical axis to display the magnitude of the
complex measured quantity.
Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the
complex quantity C, i.e. |C| = sqrt ( Re(C)
2
+ Im(C)
2
), appears on the vertical axis, scaled in dB. The
decibel conversion is calculated according to dB Mag(C) = 20 * log(|C|) dB.
Application: dB Mag is the default format for the complex, dimensionless S-parameters. The dB-scale is
the natural scale for measurements related to power ratios (insertion loss, gain etc.).
Alternative Formats
The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale. It is possible to view the real
and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase. Both the magnitude and phase are displayed in
the polar diagram.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat MLOGarithmic
Phase
Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of a complex measured
quantity in the range between 180 degrees and +180 degrees.
Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the
complex quantity C, i.e. X (C) = arctan ( Im(C) / Re(C) ), appears on the vertical axis. X (C) is measured
relative to the phase at the start of the sweep (reference phase = 0). If X (C) exceeds +180 the curve
jumps by 360; if it falls below 180, the trace jumps by +360. The result is a trace with a typical
sawtooth shape. The alternative Phase Unwrapped format avoids this behavior.
Application: Phase measurements, e.g. phase distortion, deviation from linearity.
Alternative Formats:
The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. It is
possible to view the real and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase. Both the magnitude
and phase are displayed in the polar diagram. As an alternative to direct phase measurements, the
analyzer provides the derivative of the phase response for a frequency sweep (Delay).
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat PHASe
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
194
Smith
Selects a Smith chart to display a complex quantity, primarily a reflection S-parameter.
Properties: The Smith chart is a circular diagram obtained by mapping the positive complex semi-plane
into a unit circle. Points with the same resistance are located on circles, points with the same reactance
produce arcs. If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S
11
, S
22
etc.), then the unit
Smith chart represents the normalized impedance. In contrast to the polar diagram, the scaling of the
diagram is not linear.
Application: Reflection measurements, see application example.
The axis for the sweep variable is lost in Smith charts but the marker functions easily provide the
stimulus value of any measurement point. dB values for the magnitude and other conversions can be
obtained by means of the Marker Format functions.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat SMITh
Polar
Selects a polar diagram to display a complex quantity, primarily an S-parameter or ratio.
Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a
horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its
distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis. In contrast to the
Smith chart, the scaling of the axes is linear.
Application: Reflection or transmission measurements, see application example.
The axis for the sweep variable is lost in polar diagrams but the marker functions easily provide the
stimulus value of any measurement point. dB values for the magnitude and other conversions can be
obtained by means of the Marker Format functions.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat POLar
Group Delay
Calculates the (group) delay from the measured quantity (primarily: from a transmission S-parameter) and
displays it in a Cartesian diagram.
Properties: The group delay `
g
represents the propagation time of wave through a device. `
g
is a real
quantity and is calculated as the negative of the derivative of its phase response. A non-dispersive DUT
shows a linear phase response, which produces a constant delay (a constant ratio of phase difference to
frequency difference).
Mathematical relations: Delay, Aperture, Electrical Length
The group delay is defined as:
where
X
rad/deg
= Phase response in radians or degrees
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
195
Y = Frequency/angular velocity in radians/s
f = Frequency in Hz
In practice, the analyzer calculates an approximation to the derivative of the phase response, taking a
small frequency interval Qf and determining the corresponding phase change Qa. The delay is thus
computed as:
The aperture Qf must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement.
If the delay is constant over the considered frequency range (non-dispersive DUT, e.g. a cable), then `
g
and `
g,meas
are identical and
where Qt is the propagation time of the wave across the DUT, which often can be expressed in terms of its
mechanical length L
mech
, the permittivity ], and the velocity of light c. The product of L
mech
.
sqrt(N) is termed
the electrical length of the DUT and is always larger or equal than the mechanical length (] > 1 for all
dielectrics and ] = 1 for the vacuum).
Application: Transmission measurements, especially with the purpose of investigating deviations from
linear phase response and phase distortions. To obtain the delay a frequency sweep must be active.
The cables connecting the analyzer test ports to the DUT introduce an unwanted delay, which often
can be assumed to be constant. Use the Zero Delay at Marker function, define a numeric length Offset or
use the Auto Length function to mathematically compensate for this effect in the measurement results. To
compensate for a frequency-dependent delay in the test setup, a system error correction is required.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat GDELay
Aperture
Sets a delay aperture for the delay calculation. The aperture Qf is entered as an integer number of
Aperture Steps:
The analyzer calculates the aperture from the sweep points of the current frequency sweep.
Properties: The delay at each sweep point is computed as:
where the aperture Qf is a finite frequency interval around the sweep point f
o
and the analyzer measures
the corresponding phase change Qa.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
196
Calculation of Jf and JK
With a given number of aperture steps n the delay at sweep point no. m is calculated as follows:
If n is even (n = 2k), then Qf (m) = f (m+k) f (mk) and Qa(m) = Qa (m+k) Qa (mk).
If n is odd (n = 2k+1), then Qf (m) = f (m+k) f (mk1) and (m)= Qa (m+k) Qa (mk1).
The delay calculation is based on the already measured sweep points and does not slow down the
measurement.
Qf is constant over the entire sweep range, if the sweep type is a Lin. Frequency sweep. For Log.
Frequency and Segmented Frequency sweeps, it varies with the sweep point number m.
Application The aperture must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement. A small aperture
increases the noise in the group delay; a large aperture tends to minimize the noise effects, but at the
expense of frequency resolution. Phase perturbations which are narrower in frequency than the aperture
tend to be smeared over and can not be measured.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture:SCOunt
SWR
Calculates the Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) from the measured quantity (primarily: from a reflection S-
parameter) and displays it in a Cartesian diagram.
Properties: The SWR (or Voltage Standing Wave Ratio, VSWR) is a measure of the power reflected at
the input of the DUT. It is calculated from the magnitude of the reflection coefficients S
ii
(where i denotes
the port number of the DUT) according to:
The superposition of the incident and the reflected wave on the transmission line connecting the analyzer
and the DUT causes an interference pattern with variable envelope voltage. The SWR is the ratio of the
maximum voltage to the minimum envelope voltage along the line.
Interpretation of the SWR
The superposition of the incident wave I and the reflected wave R on the transmission line connecting the
analyzer and the DUT causes an interference pattern with variable envelope voltage. The SWR is the ratio
of the maximum voltage to the minimum envelope voltage along the line:
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
197
SWR = V
Max
/V
Min
= (|V
I
| + |V
R
|) / (|V
I
| |V
R
|) = (1 + |S
ii
|) / (1 |S
ii
|)
Application: Reflection measurements with conversion of the complex S-parameter to a real SWR.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat SWR
Lin Mag
Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis scale to display the magnitude of the measured
quantity.
Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the
complex quantity C, i.e. |C| = sqrt ( Re(C)
2
+ Im(C)
2
), appears on the vertical axis, also scaled linearly.
Application: Real measurement data (i.e. the Stability Factors, DC Input 1/2, and the PAE) are always
displayed in a Lin Mag diagram.
Alternative Formats
The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a logarithmic scale. It is possible to view the
real and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat MLINear
Real
Selects a Cartesian diagram to display the real part of a complex measured quantity.
Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The real part Re(C) of
the complex quantity C = Re(C) + j Im(C), appears on the vertical axis, also scaled linearly.
Application: The real part of an impedance corresponds to its resistive portion.
Alternative Formats
It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary
part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and
imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat REAL
Imag
Selects a Cartesian diagram to display the imaginary part of a complex measured quantity.
Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The imaginary part
Im(C) of the complex quantity C = Re(C) + j Im(C), appears on the vertical axis, also scaled linearly.
Application: The imaginary part of an impedance corresponds to its reactive portion. Positive (negative)
values represent inductive (capacitive) reactance.
Alternative Formats
It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary
part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
198
imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat IMAGinary
Inv Smith
Selects an inverted Smith chart to display a complex quantity, primarily a reflection S-parameter.
Properties: The Inverted Smith chart is a circular diagram obtained by mapping the positive complex
semi-plane into a unit circle. If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S
11
, S
22
etc.), then
the unit Inverted Smith chart represents the normalized admittance. In contrast to the polar diagram, the
scaling of the diagram is not linear.
Application: Reflection measurements, see application example.
The axis for the sweep variable is lost in Smith charts but the marker functions easily provide the
stimulus value of any measurement point. dB values for the magnitude and other conversions can be
obtained by means of the Marker Format functions.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat ISMith
Unwrapped Phase
Selects a Cartesian diagram with an arbitrarily scaled linear vertical axis to display the phase of the
measured quantity.
Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the
complex quantity C, i.e. X (C) = arctan ( Im(C) / Re(C) ), appears on the vertical axis. X (C) is measured
relative to the phase at the start of the sweep (reference phase = 0). In contrast to the normal Phase
format, the display range is not limited to values between 180 and +180. This avoids artificial jumps of
the trace but can entail a relatively wide phase range if the sweep span is large.
Application: Phase measurements, e.g. phase distortion, deviation from linearity.
After changing to the Unwrapped Phase format, use Trace Scale Autoscale to re-scale the vertical
axis and view the entire trace.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat UPHase
Scale
The Scale settings define how the current trace is presented in the diagram selected in the Format
submenu.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
199
Autoscale adjusts the diagram scale in order to display the entire active trace in the diagram area.
Autoscale All adjusts the diagram scale in order to display all traces in the diagram area.
Scale/Div sets the value of the vertical diagram divisions.
Ref Value sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a polar
diagram.
Ref Position defines the position of the reference line in a Cartesian diagram.
Maximize maximizes the active diagram area.
Overlay All displays all traces in one diagram area.
Split All displays every trace in a separate diagram area.
The Scale settings are closely related to the settings in the Format submenu and in the Display menu. All
of them have an influence on the way the analyzer presents data on the screen.
The Scale settings depend on the diagram type (Trace Format) because not all diagrams can be scaled
in the same way:
In Cartesian diagrams, all scale settings are available.
In circular diagrams, no Scale/Div., no Ref. Position, and no Max and Min values can be defined.
The default scale is activated automatically when a display format (diagram type) is selected. Scale
settings that are not compatible with the current display format are disabled (grayed).
Relations between the scaling parameters
The scaling parameters Scale / Div, Ref Value, Ref Position, Max, Min are coupled together in the
following manner:
Max Min = Scale / Div * <Number of graticule divisions>
Max = Ref Value when Ref Position is 10
Min = Ref Value when Ref Position is 0
The Marker -> provide a convenient alternative to manual diagram scaling.
Autoscale
Adjusts the Scale Divisions and the Ref. Value in order to display the entire active trace in the diagram
area, leaving an appropriate display margin.
In Cartesian diagrams, the analyzer re-calculates the values of the vertical divisions so that the
trace fits onto 80% of the vertical grid. The reference value is chosen to center the trace in the
diagram.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
200
In circular diagrams (Polar, Smith, Inverted Smith), the analyzer re-calculates the values of the
radial divisions so that the diagram is confined to approx. 80% of the outer circumference. The
reference value is set to the value of the outer circumference.
Autoscale does not affect the stimulus values and the horizontal axis.
Remote control: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE
Autoscale All
Adjusts the Scale Divisions and the Ref. Value in order to display all traces in the diagram area, leaving an
appropriate display margin. This scale settings are analogous to the Autoscale function. The traces in the
active diagram area are taken into account irrespective of their channel assignment.
Scale / Div
Sets the value of the vertical diagram divisions in Cartesian diagrams.
Scale /Div corresponds to the increment between two consecutive grid lines. The unit depends on the
display format: dB for display format dB Mag, degrees for Phase and Unwrapped Phase, ns for Delay, U
(units) for all other (dimensionless) formats.
Scale /Div is not available (grayed) for circular diagrams (Polar, Smith, Inverted Smith).
Remote control: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:PDIVision
Ref Value
Sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a circular diagram.
In Cartesian diagrams Ref. Value defines the value of the reference line, indicated by a
symbol at the right edge of the diagram area. The color of the symbol corresponds to the trace
color. As the Ref. Value is varied, the position of the reference line (Ref. Position) is left
unchanged, so that the current trace is shifted in vertical direction. The unit of the Ref. Value
depends on the display format: dB for display format dB Mag, degrees for Phase and Unwrapped
Phase, ns for Delay, U (units) for all other (dimensionless) formats.
In circular diagrams (Polar, Smith, Inverted Smith), Ref. Value defines the value of the outer
circumference. Changing Ref. Value enlarges or scales down the diagram, leaving the center
unchanged. The unit is U (units) for all circular diagrams.
Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of the reference value.
Remote control: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:RLEVel
Ref Position
Defines the position of the reference line in a Cartesian diagram.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
201
The reference line is indicated by a symbol at the right edge of the diagram area. The color of the
symbol corresponds to the trace color. Ref. Position is defined on a linear scale between 0 (bottom line of
the diagram) and 10 (top line of the diagram). As the Ref. Position is varied, the value of the reference line
(Ref. Value) is left unchanged, so the current trace is shifted together with the Ref. Position.
Ref. Position is not available (grayed) for polar diagrams (Polar, Smith, Inverted Smith).
Use the analyzer's drag-and-drop functionality to move the reference line symbol to the desired
position.
Remote control: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:RPOSition
Maximize
Maximizes all diagram areas of the active setup to occupy the whole window, placing the active diagram
area on top. Clicking Maximize again restores the previous display configuration.
A double-click into any point in the diagram area is equivalent to the Maximize function. To view all
traces in a common, maximized diagram area, select Overlay all.
Remote control: DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:MAXimize ON | OFF
Overlay All
Places all traces in a single diagram area which is maximized to occupy the whole window. This function
is available irrespective of the trace Format and the Channel settings; it is even possible to overlay
Cartesian and polar diagrams.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
202
The active trace and active channel is highlighted. The scaling of the axes corresponds to the active trace.
To hide all traces except the active one, select Split All and Maximize.
Remote control: No command, display configuration only.
Split All
Splits the active window into as many diagram areas as there are traces and assigns a single trace to
each area.
Remote control: No command, display configuration only.
Lines
The commands in the Lines submenu define limits for the measurement results, visualize them in the
diagrams and activate/deactivate the limit check. Besides the menu provides a horizontal line for each
trace.
Limit Lines
A limit line is a set of data to specify the allowed range for some or all points of a trace. Typically, limit
lines are used to check whether a DUT conforms to the rated specifications (conformance testing).
The upper limit line defines the maximum value for the trace points.
The lower limit line defines the minimum value for the trace points.
A limit check consists of comparing the measurement results to the limit lines and display a pass/fail
indication.
Upper and lower limit lines are both defined as a combination of segments with a linear dependence
between the measured quantity and the sweep variable (stimulus variable). The limit lines can be stored to
a file and recalled. Data or memory traces can be used to define the segments of a limit line. Moreover it
is possible to modify the limit lines globally by adding an offset to the stimulus or response values.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
203
(No direct access via front panel keys)
Show Limit Line displays or hides the limit line associated with the active trace.
Limit Check On activates or deactivates the limit check.
Define Limit Line opens a dialog to define, save or recall limit lines.
Horizontal Line displays or hides the horizontal line of the active trace and changes its position.
Global Limit Check activates a global (composite) limit check on all traces in the active setup.
Limit lines are available for all Cartesian diagram types (Trace Format). For polar diagrams, the
functions of the Lines submenu are grayed. The limit lines are hidden and the limit check is disabled when
a Cartesian trace format is replaced by a polar diagram.
Show Limit Line
Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area. A checkmark
appears next to the menu item when the limit line is shown.
In the diagram, upper and lower limit lines can be displayed with different colors. Limit line segments with
disabled limit check (see Define Limit Line) can also be colored differently. The limit line colors are defined
in the Define User Color Scheme dialog (Display Display Config. Color Scheme...).
Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other: Hiding the limit line does not
switch off the limit check.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe] ON | OFF
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
204
Limit Check On
Switches the limit check of the active trace on or off. A checkmark appears next to the menu item when
the limit check is enabled.
When the limit check is switched on, a PASS or FAIL message is displayed in the center of the diagram. If
the limit check fails at a measurement point, the two trace segments to the left and right of the point can
change their color. The Limit Fail Trace color is defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog (Display
Display Config. Color Scheme...).
Limit check and display of the limit lines are independent of each other: With disabled limit check, the
limit line can still be displayed, however, no display elements indicating a limit failure will appear.
If no limit lines are defined for the active trace, the limit check can be switched on but will always
PASS the trace.
Limits are checked at the actual measurement points, whereas a limit failure is indicated for the trace
segments on both sides of a failed point. A small number of points causes wide trace segments so that the
out-of tolerance regions can appear wider as they are.
Markers show interpolated values. As a consequence, a trace segment can be failed, whereas a marker
placed on the segment may show a response value within the allowed range. This is shown in the
example below, with an upper limit line at 26 dB, and a marker response value of 25.968 dB. The small
circles correspond to the sweep points; the orange part of the trace is failed.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:FAIL?
Define Limit Line
Opens a dialog to define the limit line for the active trace on a segment-by-segment basis. In each
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
205
segment the limit line is defined as a straight line connecting two points.
Creating limit lines with minimum effort
Choose one of the following methods to efficiently create and handle limit lines:
To define a limit line with only a few segments, use Add Segment and edit each segment in the
segment table individually.
Use the multiselection feature to edit several limit line segments at the same time.
Select a data or memory trace as a limit line (Import Trace) or import a trace stored in a file
(Import File).
Save your limit lines to a file so you can re-use or modify them later sessions (Save Limit Line,
Recall Limit Line).
The Define Limit Line dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the limit line; see below.
The active trace is indicated in the title bar of the dialog. The three buttons below the table extend or
shorten the segment list.
Add Segment adds a new segment to the list. The new segment is a copy of the previously active
segment and inserted after that segment. The current segment numbers are adapted. The
analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line.
Delete Segment removes the selected segment from the list.
Del All Segments clears the entire segment list so it is possible to define or load a new limit line.
The buttons to the right of the table are used to import and export limit line data.
Recall Limit Line... calls up an Open File dialog to load a limit line from a limit line file. Limit line
files are ASCII files with the default extension *.limit and a special file format.
Save Limit Line... calls up a Save As... dialog to store the current limit line configuration to a limit
line file. Limit line files are ASCII files with the default extension *.limit and a special file format.
Import Trace
opens a box to select a trace that can be used to define a limit line.
The box contains all data or memory traces of the active channel. As soon as a trace is selected,
the Properties of Imported Segments dialogwith further global import options is opened.
Import File
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
206
Calls up a standard Import File dialog to load a limit line from a trace file. The limit line import is
analogous to the import of traces. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. After the
trace file is selected, the Properties of Imported Segments dialogwith further global import options
is opened.
Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n 1 segments. The number of points n is set via
Channel Sweep Number of Points. The n 1 segments are appended to the current segment table for
further editing. Existing limit line segments are not overwritten.
To import a limit line file (*.limit) you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double-click the
file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application. You have to switch on the limit check separately.
Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of Start and Stop values.
Columns in the segment table
The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable
columns:
Type indicates whether the segment belongs to an Upper or a Lower limit line, or if the limit check
at the segment is switched Off. Switching off the limit check does not delete the segment but
changes its screen color.
Start Stimulus is the stimulus (x-axis) value of the first point of the segment (not necessarily
smaller than Stop Stimulus).
Stop Stimulus is the stimulus (x-axis) value of the last point of the segment (not necessarily larger
than Start Stimulus).
Start Response is the response (y-axis) value of the first point of the segment.
Stop Response is the response (y-axis) value of the last point of the segment.
The limit line segment is calculated as a straight line connecting the two points (<Start Stimulus>, <Start
Response>) and (<Stop Stimulus>, <Stop Response>); see Rules for Limit Line Definition.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA]
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGment<Seg>...
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer...
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer...
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DELete:ALL
CALCulate<Ch>:LIMit:SEGMent:COUNt?
MMEMory:STORe:LIMit
MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit
Multi-Selection of Limit Line Segments
In the Define Limit Line dialog it is possible to edit several limit line segments at the same time. Selection
of two or more segments (use the left mouse key and the Shift key of an external keyboard) and a right-
click on the dark grey Seg. area opens a context menu:
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
207
The context menu provides the following functions:
Modification of all entries in the segment table: Type, start and stop values for the stimulus and
response variable.
Definition of an offset for response and stimulus values in analogy to the Properties of Imported
Segments dialog.
Delete the selected segments.
Merge the selected segments to a single new segment. The start and stop values of the new
segment are given by the start values of the first selected segment and the stop value of the last
selected segment. The type is taken from the first selected segment. The new segment replaces
the selected segments.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer...
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer...
Rules for Limit Line Definition
The analyzer places very few restrictions on the definition of limit line segments. The following rules
ensure a maximum of flexibility:
Segments don't have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the Start Stimulus value
of segment no. n doesn't have to be smaller than the Start Stimulus value of segment no. n+1).
Overlapping segments are allowed. The limit check in the overlapping area refers to the tighter
limit (the pass test involves a logical AND operation).
Gaps between segments are allowed and equivalent to switching off an intermediate limit line
segment.
Limit lines can be partially or entirely outside the sweep range, however, the limits are only
checked at the measurement points.
The following figure shows a limit line consisting of 3 upper and 2 lower limit line segments. To pass the
limit check, the trace must be confined to the shaded area.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
208
As a consequence of the limit line rules, the limit check will always pass a DUT if no limit lines are defined.
File Import Settings
The Properties of Imported Segments dialog appears before a trace is imported into the Define Limit Line
dialog.
The dialog assigns common properties to all limit line segments generated by the imported trace.
Offsets contains two input fields to define constant offset values for all imported segments. The
Response offset shifts all segments in vertical direction, the Stimulus offset shifts them in
horizontal direction. The offsets are added to the start and stop values of all segments.
Type defines whether the imported segments belong to the Upper or Lower limit line. A third option
is to import the segments but disable the limit check (Off).
Remote
control:
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:FEED
<stimulus_offset>,<response_offset>[,<trace_name>]
CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:FEED
<stimulus_offset>,<response_offset>[,<trace_name>]
MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit
File Format for Limit Lines
The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the
extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the Export Limit Line and Import Limit Line dialogs.
The file starts with a preamble containing the channel and trace name and the header of the segment list.
The following lines contain the entries of all editable columns of the list.
Example of a limit line file
The limit line:
is described by the limit line file:
Remote control: MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit "Trc_name","file_name"
MMEMory:STORe:LIMit "Trc_name","file_name"
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
209
Horizontal Line
Shows or hides the horizontal line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area. A
checkmark appears next to the menu item when the horizontal line is shown.
The horizontal line (or display line) is a red line which can be moved to particular trace points in order to
retrieve the response values.
Pressing Horizontal Line for a first time shows the line for the active trace and opens the numeric
entry bar to define its position (response value). The (rounded) position is displayed near the left
edge of the screen.
Pressing Horizontal Line for a second time hides the horizontal line for the active trace.
Use the analyzer's drag-and-drop functionality to move the horizontal line symbol to the desired
position.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe
Global Limit Check On
Performs a composite limit check on all traces of the current setup. The result of the global check appears
in a popup box whenever Global Limit Check is pressed.
or
PASS represents pass for all traces for which the limit check is enabled. A trace without limit lines
or with disabled individual limit check always passes the composite limit check.
FAIL means that the limit checks for one or more traces failed.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:CLIMits:FAIL?
Ripple Test
Ripple Test
The commands in the second section of the Lines submenu define the ripple test. A ripple test is a special
type of limit test where the maximum difference between the largest and the smallest response value of
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
210
the trace must not exceed the specified limit. This test is suitable e.g. to check whether the passband
ripple of a filter is within acceptable limits, irrespective of the actual transmitted power in the passband.
See also background information for Limit Lines.
(No direct access via front panel keys)
Global Check activates a global (composite) limit check on all traces in the active setup.
Show Ripple Limits displays or hides the limit line associated to the active trace.
Ripple Check On activates or deactivates the ripple limit check.
Define Ripple Test... opens a dialog to define, save or recall limit lines.
Ripple limit lines are available for all Cartesian diagram types (Trace Format). For polar diagrams, the
functions of the ripple check (except the Global Check) are grayed. The limit lines are hidden and the
ripple limit check (except the global check) is disabled when a Cartesian trace format is replaced by a
polar diagram.
Global Check
Activates or deactivates the global limit check including upper/lower limits and ripple limits. The global limit
check is a composite limit check over all traces of the current setup. The result of the global check
appears in a popup box whenever Global Limit Check is pressed.
or
PASS represents pass for all traces with enabled limit check. A trace without limit lines or with
disabled individual limit check always passes the global check.
FAIL means that the limit check for one or more traces failed.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:CLIMits:FAIL?
Show Ripple Limits
Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area. A
checkmark appears next to the menu item when the limit line is shown.
The vertical positions of the ripple lines are re-calculated after each sweep; only their stimulus range and
distance (the ripple limit) if fixed. The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog
(Nwa-Setup Display Config. Color Scheme...).
Display of the ripple limits and limit check are independent of each other: Hiding the limits does not
switch off the limit check.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
211
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] ON | OFF
Ripple Check On
Switches the ripple limit check of the active trace on or off. A checkmark appears next to the menu item
when the limit check is enabled.
When the limit check is switched on, an info field shows the pass/fail information and the measured ripple
in each ripple limit range. If the limit check fails in a particular ripple line range, the trace within the range
can change its color. The Limit Fail Trace color is defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog (Display
Display Config. Color Scheme...).
Ripple limit check and display of the limit lines are independent of each other: With disabled limit
check, the limit line can still be displayed.
If no limit lines are defined for the active trace, the limit check can be switched on but will always
PASS the trace.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL?
CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGment<Seg>:STATe ON | OFF
CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGment<Seg>:RESult?
Define Ripple Test...
Opens a dialog to define the ripple limits for the active trace on a range-by-range basis. A separate ripple
limit can be assigned to each range.
Defining ripple limits with minimum effort
Choose one of the following methods to efficiently create and handle ripple limit ranges:
To configure a limit test with only a few ranges, use Add Range and edit each range in the table
individually.
Use the Align All Ranges button to create non-overlapping, contiguous ranges of equal width.
Use the multiselection feature to edit several ranges at the same time.
Save your ripple ranges to a file so you can re-use or modify them later sessions (Save Ripple
Limit..., Recall Ripple Limit...).
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
212
The Define Ripple Limit dialog contains a table to edit the individual ripple check ranges; see below. The
active trace is indicated in the title bar of the dialog. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or re-
order the range list.
Add Range adds a new range to the list. The new range is and inserted after the previously
selected range. The current range numbers are adapted; the start and stop stimulus values are
set so that an overlap is avoided. Moreover, the ripple limit is estimated according to the
measured ripple of the trace in the created range. The analyzer places no restriction on the
number of ranges assigned to each trace.
Del. Range removes the selected range from the list.
Align All Ranges subdivides the entire sweep range into contiguous ripple limit ranges of equal
width. The ripple limits are estimated according to the measured ripple of the trace in the created
ranges.
Del All Ranges clears the entire range list so it is possible to define or load a new ripple limit line.
The buttons to the right of the table are used to import and export limit line data.
Recall Ripple Limit... calls up an Open File dialog to load a ripple limit line from a file. Ripple limit
files are ASCII files with the default extension *.ripple and a special file format.
Save Ripple Limit... calls up a Save As... dialog to store the current ripple limit configuration to a
ripple limit file. Ripple limit files are ASCII files with the default extension *.ripple and a special file
format.
To import a ripple limit file (*.limit) you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double-click the
file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application. You have to switch on the limit check separately.
Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of Start and Stop values.
Columns in the range table
The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each range plus the following editable
columns:
Range On/Off indicates whether the ripple limit check in the range is enabled (On) or Off.
Switching off the ripple limit check does not delete the range but hides the entry in the info field.
Start Stimulus is the smallest stimulus (x-axis) value of the range.
Stop Stimulus is the largest stimulus (x-axis) value of the range.
Ripple Limit is the maximum allowed difference between the largest and the smallest trace value
in the range.
The ripple limit range is displayed as two parallel, horizontal lines in the diagram. Stop Stimulus Start
Stimulus is the length of both lines; Ripple Limit is their distance; see Rules for Limit Line Definition.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Trace Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
213
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain
CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA
CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGment<Seg>...
CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DELete:ALL
MMEMory:STORe:RIPPle
MMEMory:LOAD:RIPPle
Multi-Selection of Ripple Limit Ranges
In the Define Ripple Limit dialog it is possible to edit several limit ripple ranges at the same time. Selection
of one or more ranges (use the left mouse key and the Shift key of an external keyboard) and a right-click
on the dark grey Seg. area opens a context menu:
The context menu provides the following functions:
Modification of all entries in the range table: Range On/Off, stimulus start and stop values, ripple
limit.
Definition of an offset for response and stimulus values in analogy to the Properties of Imported
Ranges dialog.
Delete the selected ranges.
Merge the selected ranges to a single new range. The start and stop values of the new range are
given by the start values of the first selected range and the stop value of the last selected range.
The first range also provides the ripple limit and the information whether the merged range is on
or off. The new, merged range replaces the selected ranges.
Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>...
Rules for Ripple Limit Definition
The analyzer places very few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure
a maximum of flexibility:
Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the Start Stimulus value
of range no. n doesn't have to be smaller than the Start Stimulus value of range no. n+1).
Overlapping ranges are allowed. The limit check in the overlapping area is related to the tighter
limit (the pass test involves a logical AND operation).
Gaps between ranges are allowed and equivalent to switching off an intermediate ripple limit
range.
Ripple limit ranges can be partially or entirely outside the sweep range, however, the limits are
only checked at the measurement points.
The following figure shows a ripple limit test involving 3 ranges.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
214
As a consequence of the limit line rules, the limit check will always pass a DUT if no limit lines are defined.
File Format for Ripple Limit Lines
The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export ripple limit data. By default, the limit line file has the
extension *.ripple and is stored in the directory shown in the Save Ripple Limit and Recall Ripple Limit
dialogs. The file starts with a preamble containing the channel and trace name and the header of the
range list. The following lines contain the entries of all editable columns of the list.
Example of a limit line file
The ripple limit list:
is described by the ripple limit file:
Remote control: MMEMory:LOAD:RIPPle "Trc_name","file_name"
MMEMory:STORe:RIPPle "Trc_name","file_name"
Channel Menu
The Channel menu provides all channel settings and the functions to activate, modify and store different
channels.
Channels
A channel contains hardware-related settings to specify how the network analyzer collects data. The
channel settings can be divided into three main groups:
Control of the measurement process (Sweep, Trigger, Average)
Description of the test setup (internal source power, IF filters and step attenuators)
Correction data (Calibration, Offset)
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
215
The channel settings complement the definitions of the Trace menu. Each trace is assigned to a channel,
see Traces, Channels and Diagram Areas. The channel settings apply to all traces assigned to the
channel.
(No direct access via front panel keys)
The Channel menu contains the following functions and submenus:
Stimulus defines the sweep range, depending on the sweep type.
Pwr Bw defines the power of the internal signal source, sets the step attenuators and the IF
bandwidths, and configures the sweep average.
Cal provides all functions that are necessary to perform a system error correction (calibration).
Sweep defines the scope of measurement, including the sweep type and the periodicity of the
measurement.
Channel Select provides functions to handle and activate channels.
Stimulus
The Stimulus submenu defines the frequency sweep range in the current channel.
In Cartesian diagrams, the sweep range corresponds to the diagram width and defines the scaling
of the x-axis.
In polar diagrams and Smith charts the stimulus axis is lost but the marker functions easily provide
the stimulus value of any measurement point.
Center opens the input field for the center frequency. It corresponds to the center of the Cartesian
diagram, i.e. (Start + Stop)/2.
Span opens the input field for the frequency span. It corresponds to the diagram width, i.e. (Stop
Start).
Start opens the input field for the the lowest frequency to be measured. It corresponds to the left
edge of the Cartesian diagram.
Stop opens the input field for the highest frequency to be measured. It corresponds to the right
edge of the Cartesian diagram.
Power defines the power of the internal signal source.
The Marker Functions provide a convenient alternative to the manual entry of the sweep range
parameters. Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of Start and Stop values.
Equivalence
of settings:
For a frequency sweep the Start and Stop frequencies or the Center frequency and
Span are alternative settings:
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
216
Remote
control:
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STARt
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STOP
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CENTer
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN
Pwr Bw
The Pwr Bw submenu defines the power of the internal signal source and sets the step attenuators and
the IF bandwidths.
Power defines the power of the internal signal source.
Step Atten b1/b2...sets the attenuation for the received wave b1 or b2 respectively.
RF Off switches the internal and external power sources on (if checked) or off.
Meas Bandwidth selects the bandwidth of the IF measurement filter.
Power
Opens the numeric entry bar to set the power of the internal signal source (channel power).
The channel power determines the output power at the test ports; see info below.
The selected channel power applies to all source ports used in the active channel.
Remote control: SOURce<Ch>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
217
Step Atten b1..., Step Atten b2...
Opens the numeric entry bar to set the attenuation for the received wave b1 or b2 respectively.
The attenuation is used to adjust the received signal level at the port to the input level range of the
analyzer in order to avoid damage to the instrument, e.g. if the DUT is a power amplifier. The range of
values depends on the analyzer model.
Using a single step attenuation b1 or b2 corresponds to a standard test setup with 0 dB generator
attenuation and attenuation of the (amplified) wave received at test port 1/2.
Remote
control:
INPut<Pt>:ATTenuation
[SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation ARECeiver | BRECeiver,
<attenuation>
RF Off
RF Off switches the internal and external power sources on (if checked) or off. Switching off the RF power
helps to prevent overheating of a connected DUT while not measurement results are taken.
Remote control: OUTPut<Ch>[:STATe] ON | OFF
Meas Bandwidth
Sets the measurement bandwidth of the IF filter. Meas Bandwidth opens a submenu (and displays a range
of softkeys) to directly select bandwidths between 10 Hz and 500 kHz:
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
218
Fine Adjust... opens a dialog to modify the selected measurement bandwidth and the selectivity of the IF
filter.
The input field shows the last IF filter bandwidth selected. The arrow buttons increment and
decrement the bandwidth in 1-2-5 steps for each decade. Entered values between the steps will
be rounded up, values exceeding the maximum bandwidth rounded down.
Filter Type selects between two types of IF filters: Fast filters with short settling time and Normal
filters with longer settling time but higher selectivity.
The selected bandwidth and selectivity applies to all filters used in the current channel. This makes sense
because the measurement speed is limited by the slowest filter in the channel. In Segmented Frequency
sweeps, the bandwidth and selectivity can be set independently for each segment; see Define Segments.
Optimizing the filter settings
A high selectivity (Filter Type: Normal) and a small filter bandwidth both suppress the noise level around
the measurement frequency and thus increase the dynamic range. On the other hand the time needed to
acquire a single measurement point increases for small filter bandwidths and high selectivity. For small
bandwidths, the filter settling time, which is inversely proportional to the bandwidth, is responsible for the
predominant part of the measurement time.
In general, the system error correction is no longer valid after a change of the IF filter bandwidth. The
message Cal? appears in the trace list.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]
[SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]SELect
Cal
The Cal submenu provides all functions that are necessary to perform a system error correction
(calibration).
For an introduction to calibration and calibration types refer to section Calibration Overview in the
System Overview chapter. See also the Data Flow overview in the System Overview chapter.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
219
Start Cal opens a submenu to select a new calibration and start the calibration wizard.
Repeat Prev Cal reopens the wizard to repeat and optimize the previous calibration.
Correction Off activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel.
Port Extensions provides a selection of length offset parameters to shift the measurement plane.
Cal Manager opens a dialog to store system error correction data to a Cal Pool and to assign
correction data to channels.
Recall Last Cal Set loads and activates the setup for which the last calibration was performed.
Cal Kits opens a dialog to manage the calibration kits in use, add new kits and import or export
kits.
Start Cal
The Start Cal submenu selects the calibrated ports and the calibration type.
The calibration types depend on the number of test ports of the analyzer. For a four-port unit:
One-Port P1 and One-Port P2 open submenus to select a one-port calibration at test ports PORT
1 and PORT 2, respectively.
Two-Port P1 P2 opens a submenu to select a two-port calibration at test ports PORT 1 and
PORT 2.
Calibrations can be performed automatically using the Calibration Unit (accessory R&S ZV-Z5x).
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine
One-Port P1, One-Port P2
Opens a submenu to select a one-port calibration at test ports PORT 1 or PORT 2. The two submenus are
identical:
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
220
One-port calibrations can be performed automatically or manually.
Calibration Unit 75 Q starts an automatic full one-port calibration. This function is enabled while
the Calibration Unit is connected.
The following menu commands calls up the start dialog of the calibration wizard to start a manual
calibration:
Normalize (Short) initiates a normalization using a short standard.
Full initiates a full one-port calibration.
Remote
control:
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO ' ', <port_no> (for matching
analyzer and cal unit ports)
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs (for arbitrary pairs of ports)
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine
Two-Port P1 P2
Opens a submenu to select a two-port calibration at test ports PORT 1 and PORT 2:
One-port calibrations can be performed automatically or manually.
Calibration Unit 75 Q starts an automatic tow-port TOSM calibration. This function is enabled
while the Calibration Unit is connected.
The following menu commands calls up the start dialog of the calibration wizard to start a manual
calibration:
Normalization Forward... initiates a normalization in forward direction (using PORT 1 as a source
port and a through standard). This calibration type is preferable (compared to a normalization in
both directions), if only forward transmission parameters (S
21
) are measured.
Normalization Backward... initiates a normalization in backward (reverse) direction (using PORT 2
as a source port and a through standard). This calibration type is preferable (compared to a
normalization in both directions), if only reverse transmission parameters (S
12
) are measured.
Normalization Both Directions... initiates a normalization in forward and backward direction (using
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
221
a through standard). This calibration type is preferable (compared to a unidirectional
normalization), if both transmission parameters (S
21
and S
12
) are measured.
One Path Two-Port initiates a full one-port calibration.
TOSM initiates a Through-Open-Short-Match (12-term) calibration
Remote
control:
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO ' ', <port_no> (for matching
analyzer and cal unit ports)
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs (for arbitrary pairs of ports)
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine
Guided Calibration
The analyzer provides a calibration wizard for each calibration type. The guided calibration consists of the
following steps:
Select Physical Port Connectors and calibration kits at all calibrated ports.
Measure Standards: Acquire measurement data for all standards required for the selected calibration
type.
Calculate the system error correction data (error terms) from the measurement data of the standards
and apply the result to the active channel.
A successful calibration will supersede the previous calibration, discarding all previous system error
correction data. To keep older correction data you can transfer them into a Cal Pool using the Calibration
Manager.
The system error correction data determined in a calibration procedure are stored on the analyzer. You
can read these correction data using the remote control command [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CDATa.
You can also replace the correction data of the analyzer by your own correction data sets.
Select Connectors
The first dialog of the calibration wizard displays a table to select the connectors and calibration kits for all
calibrated physical ports.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
222
The table contains the following rows:
Physical Port Number #
The ports (and therefore the number of table rows) are determined by the active calibration type
selected in the Start Cal submenu.
Connector
provides a drop-down list to select the connector type An (f) behind the connector type denotes
female connectors, an (m) denotes male connectors. Symmetric (sexless) connectors (e.g. PC7)
are not labeled. User-defined connectors can be added or removed in the Available Connector
Types dialog, which is opened from the Channel Cal Cal Kits dialog. at the port and its gender.
If Same Connector at All Ports in Table is active, the connector types at all ports (but not their
gender) are always adjusted to the current selection. The default selection depends on the
analyzer model, e.g. on the reference impedance (50 V / 75 V).
Ref Imp shows the reference impedance for the selected connector.
Calibration Kits
provides a drop-down list to select a calibration kit. The list contains all calibration kits available for
the selected connector type. The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the
same for all physical ports: If a calibration kit is changed, the analyzer automatically assigns the
new kit to all ports with the same connector type.
Completness: The selected calibration kit must contain all standards needed for the active
calibration type. If it doesn't the analyzer displays an error message.
Waveguide cutoff:If a user-defined waveguide connector is assigned to one of the calibrated
ports, then the start frequency of the active channel must be above the waveguide cutoff.
Otherwise the analyzer displays an error message.
Import Kit opens the Import Calibration Kit dialog to load and (if desired) activate a cal kit file.
Next > opens the second dialog of the wizard to continue the calibration procedure.
If the calibrated channel has already been assigned to a cal group, the correction data overwrites the
cal group data, so the new calibration will affect all channels assigned to the cal group. The
network analyzer generates a notice message "New calibration will overwrite cal pool!" when
opening the calibration wizard.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
223
Checks on switching to the next dialog
When the Next> buttonis pressed the analyzer checks the calibration kits and the matching of the
calibration standards and possibly displays a notice box (confirm with OK). This happens if one of the
calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no>
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SCONnection<port_no>
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:SELect "<Ckit_Name>"
Measure Standards
The last dialog of the calibration wizard is used to perform the necessary measurements of standards and
to calculate the correction data.
The dialog displays the list of measured standards compiled in the previous dialog. The list is complete: All
standards must be measured to perform the selected calibrations.
Structure of the Measured Standards list
The list of measured standards has a tree structure.
The first level contains all physical ports where one-port (reflection) measurements are
required and all physical port combinations where two-port (transmission)
measurements must be performed.
The second level contains check boxes for the standards to be measured at each port or
port combination.
For a sliding match, a third level contains check boxes for the different positions of the
sliding element.
To expand the list of a physical port symbol, click the symbol, to collapse the list, double-click
the symbol.
Calibrations using a match or sliding match
If the calibration kit contains a sliding match standard, the Sliding Match appears in the Measured
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
224
Standards list whenever the selected calibration type requires a Match. A click on the node
expands the check boxes for the different positions of the load element. The number of different
positions is defined in the User Interface tab of the System Configuration dialog.
The sliding match is a one-port standard consisting of an air line with a movable, low-reflection load
element (sliding load). This standard is used because a no perfect match is available over a wide
frequency range. However, a series of measurements at a given frequency with equal mismatch
and varying phase yields reflection factors that are located on a circle in the Smith chart. The
center of this circle corresponds to perfect match. The network analyzer determines and further
corrects this match point following I. Ksa's circle-fitting algorithm.
To obtain the reflection coefficient for a perfectly matched calibration standard, the sliding load
must be measured at least at 3 positions which should be unequally spaced to avoid overlapping
data points. Increasing the number of positions to 4 6 can improve the accuracy. Moreover it is
recommended to use the predefined load positions of the standard.
The calibration is valid (Apply is available) if either the match or three positions of the sliding match
have been measured. However, it is often desirable to acquire calibration data from both standards.
The analyzer combines the data in an appropriate manner:
The match results are used up to the lower edge of the specified frequency range of the
sliding match (Min Freq).
The sliding match results are used for frequencies above the Min Freq. In general, the
sliding match will provide better results than the match within its specified frequency range.
Checking one of the boxes in the list causes the analyzer to stop the measurement in all channels except
the active one and measure the standard according to the active channel settings. The progress of the
calibration sweep and the result can be monitored in the diagram. In case of an error (e.g. if the
measurement result shows that the calibration standard was not connected properly), Abort Sweep
immediately terminates the sweep.
When the sweep is completed, a green checkmark appears in the checkbox. Measurements can be
repeated as often as desired. Newer results overwrite older measurement data.
Most channel settings remain valid for calibration sweeps.
Checks for the calibration sweep
If the sweep range of the active channel exceeds the validity range of the standard model (defined by Min
Freq and Max Freq in the Add/Modify Standard dialog) the analyzer displays a notice box (confirm with
OK).
The dialog provides further controls:
Show Measurement Diagram displays or hides the diagram to the right of the list of Measured
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
225
Standards. Hiding the diagram leaves more space for displaying the characteristics of the
measured standards.
Keep Measurement Data for >Repeat Previous Cal< causes the raw measurement data of the
standards to be stored after the calibration is completed. This enables the Repeat Prev Cal...
command, which can be used to optimize a previous calibration without repeating the
measurement of all standards. If Keep Measurement Data... is not active, then the raw
measurement data of the standards is deleted and the analyzer only stores the system error
correction data. Deleting the raw data saves disk space.
Apply is enabled as soon as data has been acquired for all standards. The button starts the
calculation of the system error correction data and closes the calibration wizard. The current
instrument settings are stored with the correction data. To avoid incompatibilities, older system
error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a Cal Pool using the Calibration
Manager.
The Keep Measurement Data for >Repeat Previous Cal< setting is valid for the current calibration
only. To activate this function in general, use the parameter in the User Interface tab of the Sytem
Configuration dialog (menu Nwa-Setup System Config).
Checks during the calculation of correction data
Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings may cause
the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays
appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:RSAVe
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQUire]:SELected
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete ["<cal_name>"]
Calibration Labels
The following labels in the trace list inform you about the status or type of the current calibration.
Label Meaning
Cal The system error correction is applied without interpolation. This means that a set of measured
correction data is available at each sweep point.
Cal
int
The system error correction is applied, however, the correction data for at least one sweep
point is interpolated from the measured values. This means that the channel settings have
been changed so that a current sweep point is different from the calibrated sweep points. It is
not possible to disable interpolation.
Cav The system error correction uses variable calibration methods to calculate a measurement
parameter. This happens for example, if a Z-parameter is calculated from S-parameters which
are partly factory calibrated and partly normalized. This can also happen, if the analyzer uses a
one port calibration at port 1 and a normalization at port 2.
Ca? The system error correction is applied, however, the accuracy is questionable because of of
the following applies:
The attenuator settings during the calibration differ from the attenuator settings during
the measurement.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
226
The bandwidth settings during the calibration differ from the bandwidth settings during
the measurement.
The point delay settings during the calibration differ from the point delay settings during
the measurement.
Cal
Off !
The system error correction is no longer applied (e.g. turned off by the user). See also
Calibration Overview.
Repeat Prev Cal
Reopens the Measure Standards dialog of the calibration wizard to repeat and optimize the previous
calibration without necessarily repeating the measurement of all standards.
Repeat Prev Cal is active only if Keep Measurement Data for >Repeat Cal< in the Measure Standards
dialog was enabled when the last calibration for the active channel was successfully completed.
Additional conditions for repeating a calibration
Changing the channel settings can cause incompatibilities between the current instrument state and the
previous calibration. In particular the following conditions must be met:
The configuration of all ports needed must be correct (see Select Connector Physical Port
Number #).
The Sweep Type must be unchanged.
If incompatible settings occur the analyzer displays an error message and does not repeat the calibration.
Correction Off
Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel. Correction Off is active only if a
valid system error correction is assigned to the active channel; see Cal State in the Calibration Manager.
A red label Cal Off ! appears behind the trace list if the system error correction is switched off; see
also Calibration Overview.
Remote control: [:SENSe<Ch>]:CORRection:STATe ON | OFF
Port Extensions
The Port Extensions submenu defines a length offset and a loss for the test ports. The offset parameters
complement the system error correction, compensating for the known length and loss of a (non-dispersive
and perfectly matched) transmission line between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT.
Length offset parameters: Definition
The Delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the transmission line. The Electrical
Length is equal to the Delay times the speed of light in the vacuum and is a measure for the length
of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane. For a line with
permittivity N
r
and mechanical length L
mech
the delay and the electrical length are calculated as
follows:
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
227
Electrical Length, Mechanical Length or Delay are coupled parameters. When one of them is
changed, the other two follow.
The velocity factor is 1/sqrt(]
r
) and is a measure for the velocity of light in a dielectric with
permittivity ]
r
relative to the velocity of light in the vacuum (velocity factor < 1). Permittivity and
velocity factor are coupled parameters.
For a non-dispersive DUT, the delay defined above is constant over the considered frequency
range and equal to the negative derivative of the phase response with respect to the frequency
(see mathematical relations). The length offset parameters compensate for a constant delay, which
is equivalent to a linear phase response.
If a dispersive connector type (i.e. a waveguide; see Offset Model dialog) is assigned to a test port
that is related to a particular quantity, then the phase of the quantity is calculated taking dispersion
effects into account.
Loss parameters: Definition
The loss L is the attenuation of a wave traveling through the offset transmission line. In logarithmic
representation, the loss can be modeled as the sum of a constant and a frequency-dependent part.
The frequency dependence is essentially due to the skin effect; the total loss can be approximated
by an expression of the following form:
The DC loss Loss
DC
, the reference frequency f
ref
, and the loss at the reference frequency Loss(f
ref
)
are empirical parameters for the transmission lines connected to each port which can be entered
into any of the dialogs in the Offset menu. For a lossless transmission line, both Loss
DC
and
Loss(f
ref
) are zero. In practice, Loss(f
ref
) often represents the dominant contribution so that Loss
DC
can be set to zero.
Offset parameters: Application and effect
Offset parameters can be particularly useful if the reference plane of the calibration cannot be
placed directly at the DUT ports, e.g. because the DUT has non-coaxial ports and can only be
measured in a test fixture. Offset parameters can also help to avoid a new complete system error
correction if a cable with known properties has to be included in the test setup.
A positive length offset moves the reference plane of the port towards the DUT, a negative offset
moves the reference plane away from the DUT. The offset parameters cannot compensate for a
possible mismatch in the test setup.
A positive length offset moves the reference plane of the port towards the DUT, which is
equivalent to deembedding the DUT from a (perfectly matched) transmission line at that
port.
A negative offset moves the reference plane away from the DUT, which is equivalent to
embedding the DUT into a (perfectly matched) transmission line at that port.
In contrast to the embedding/deembedding procedure, the offset parameters cannot compensate
for a possible mismatch in the test setup.
Each offset parameter is assigned to a particular port. The delay parameters affect the phase of all
measured quantities related to this port; the loss parameters affect their magnitude. An offset at
port 1 affects the S-parameters S
11
, S
21
, S
12
. Some quantities depend on the whole of all S-
parameters, so they are all more or less affected when one S-parameter changes due to the
addition of an offset length.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
228
To account for the propagation in both directions, the phase shift of a reflection parameter due
to a given length offset is twice the phase shift of a transmission parameter. If, at a frequency of
300 MHz, the electrical length is increased by 250 mm (d/4), then the phase of S
21
increases by 90
deg, whereas the phase of S
11
increases by 180 deg. Equivalent relations hold for the loss.
If the trace is displayed in Delay format, changing the offset parameters simply shifts the whole
trace in vertical direction. The sign of the phase shift is determined as follows:
A positive offset parameter causes a positive phase shift of the measured parameter and
therefore reduces the calculated group delay.
A negative offset parameter causes a negative phase shift of the measured parameter and
therefore increases the calculated group delay.
The offset parameters can be defined separately for each port.
Reset Lengths restores the default values for all length offsets, i.e. it resets all values to zero. The
(de-)embedding parameters are left unchanged.
Electrical Length defines electrical length offsets and loss parameters at all test ports.
Mechanical Length defines mechanical length offsets and loss parameters at all test ports.
Delay defines delay times and loss parameters at all test ports.
Auto Length determines a length offset for the receiving port of the active measured quantity with
the condition that the residual group delay of the active trace is minimized.
Auto Offset determines a length offset an loss for the receiving port of the active measured
quantity with the condition that the residual group delay of the active trace is minimized and the
measured loss is minimized as far as possible across the entire sweep range.
De-Embedding and Embedding open configuration dialogs for (de-)embedding transformation
networks.
The Zero Delay at Marker function overwrites the Offset parameters.
Remote control
(for Reset
Offsets):
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<port_no>[:STATe] <numeric
_value>
Electrical Length
Opens a dialog to define the length offset parameters for the physical test ports as electrical lengths. The
dialog also contains the DC loss, the loss at the reference frequency Loss(f
ref
); and the reference
frequency f
ref
; see Loss parameters: Definition above.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
229
The dialog provides the following additional control elements:
Select Cable Type opens a dialog to use the parameters of a standard (predefined) cable type or
add a cable type with arbitrary parameters.
If Same Offset Line Characteristics at All Ports is selected, the selected cable type is applied to all
ports.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:FREQuency
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet
Mechanical Length
Opens a dialog to define length offset parameters for the physical test ports as mechanical lengths and
permittivities. The dialog also contains the DC loss, the loss at the reference frequency Loss(f
ref
); and the
reference frequency f
ref
; see Loss parameters: Definition above.
The Mechanical Length dialog contains the three editable columns Mech. Length, Permittivity (]
r
) and
Velocity Fact 1/sqrt(]
r
); see Offset parameters: Definition above. Permittivity and velocity factor are
coupled parameters. The dialog provides the following additional control elements:
Select Cable Type opens a dialog to use the parameters of a standard (predefined) cable type or
add a cable type with arbitrary parameters.
If Same Offset Line Characteristics at All Ports is selected, the selected cable type is applied to all
ports.
Select Same Offset Line Characteristics at All Ports to change the permittivity or velocity factor for all
ports by entering a single value.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:DISTance
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:DIELectric
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:FREQuency
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
230
Delay
Opens a dialog to define the length offset parameters for the physical test ports as delays. The dialog also
contains the DC loss, the loss at the reference frequency Loss(f
ref
); and the reference frequency f
ref
; see
Loss parameters: Definition above.
The dialog provides the following additional control elements:
Select Cable Type opens a dialog to use the parameters of a standard (predefined) cable type or
add a cable type with arbitrary parameters.
If Same Offset Line Characteristics at All Ports is selected, the selected cable type is applied to all
ports.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>[:TIME]
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:FREQuency
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet
Auto Length
Adds an electrical length offset to the active test port with the condition that the residual delay of the active
trace (defined as the negative derivative of the phase response) is minimized across the entire sweep
range. If Delay is the selected trace format, the entire trace is shifted in vertical direction and centered
around zero. In phase format, the Auto Length corrected trace shows the deviation from linear phase. The
effect of a dispersive connector type (i.e. a waveguide; see Offset Model dialog) assigned to the receiving
port of the measured quantitiy is taken into account.
If the active trace shows an S-parameter S
ij
, then Auto Length adds a length offset at port i.
Preconditions for Auto Length, effect on measured quantities and exceptions
Auto Length is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase information as a
function of frequency, and if the interpretation of the results is unambiguous:
A frequency sweep must be active.
The measured quantity must be an S-parameter, a converted impedance or a converted
admittance.
The effect of Auto Length on S-parameters is to eliminate a linear phase response as described
above. The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affected. Converted admittances or
impedances are calculated from the corresponding Auto Length corrected S-parameters. Stability
factors are not derived from a single S-parameter, therefore Auto Length is disabled.
Use Zero Delay at Marker to set the delay at a special trace point to zero.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:AUTO ONCE
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
231
Auto Offset
Determines all offset parameters such that the residual group delay of the active trace (defined as the
negative derivative of the phase response) is minimized and the measured loss is minimized as far as
possible across the entire sweep range. Auto Offset involves a two-step procedure:
An Auto Length correction modifies the phase of the measured quantity, minimizing the residual
group delay. The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affected.
The auto loss correction modifies the magnitude of the measured quantity, leaving the (auto
length-corrected) phase unchanged.
Preconditions for Auto Offset, effect on measured quantities and exceptions
Auto Offset is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase information as a
function of the frequency, and if the interpretation of the results is unambiguous:
A frequency sweep must be active.
The measured quantity must be an S-parameter, a converted impedance or a converted
admittance.
The effect of Auto Offset on S-parameters is to eliminate a linear phase response and account for a
loss as described above. Converted admittances or impedances are calculated from the
corresponding Auto Offset corrected S-parameters. Stability factors are not derived from a single S-
parameter, therefore Auto Offset is disabled.
Calculation of loss parameters
The loss is assumed to be given in terms of the DC loss Loss
DC
, the reference frequency f
ref
, and
the loss at the reference frequency Loss(f
ref
). The formula used in the Auto Loss algorithm is similar
to the formula for manual entry of the loss parameters (see Loss parameters: Definition). The result
is calculated according to the following rules:
The reference frequency f
ref
is kept at its previously defined value (default: 1 GHz).
The DC loss c is zero except for S-parameters with maximum dB magnitude larger than
0.01 dB.
Auto Offset for S-parameters centers the corrected dB magnitude as close as possible
around 0 dB.
The resulting offset parameters are displayed in the Electrical Length, Mechanical Length, and
Delay dialogs.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:AUTO ONCE
Deembedding and Embedding
The Embedding... and Deembedding... dialogs define virtual networks (transformation networks) to be
added to/removed from the measurement circuit for a DUT.
Embedding a DUT into a matching network
To be integrated in application circuits, high-impedance components like Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW)
filters are often combined with a matching network. To obtain the characteristics of a component with an
added matching network, both must be integrated in the measurement circuit of the network analyzer. The
figure below shows a 2-port DUT that is combined with a real matching circuit consisting of a serial
capacitor and a shunt inductor.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
232
The idea of virtual embedding is to simulate the matching network and avoid using physical circuitry so
that the analyzer ports can be directly connected to the input and output ports of the DUT. The matching
circuit is taken into account numerically. The analyzer measures the DUT alone but provides the
characteristics of the DUT, including the desired matching circuit. This method provides a number of
advantages:
The measurement uncertainty is not impaired by the tolerances of real test fixtures.
There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated matching circuits for each type of DUT.
Calibration can be performed at the DUT's ports. If necessary (e.g. for compensating for the effect
of a test fixture) it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters.
Deembedding a DUT
Deembedding and embedding are inverse operations: A deembedding problem is given if an arbitrary real
network connected to the DUT is to be virtually removed in order to obtain the characteristics of the DUT
alone. Deembedding is typically used for DUTs which are not directly accessible because they are
inseparably connected to other components, e.g. for MMICs in a package or connectors soldered to an
adapter board.
To be numerically removed, the real network must be described by a set of S-parameters or by an
equivalent circuit of lumped elements. Deembedding the DUT effectively extends the calibration plane
towards the DUT ports, enabling a realistic evaluation of the DUT without the distorting network.
Deembedding can be combined with length offset parameters.
The simplest case of one-port deembedding can be depicted as follows:
The embedding/deembedding function in the Virtual Transform menu has the following characteristics:
Two-port networks can be applied to any of the DUT ports 1 or 2.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
233
Transformation networks can be defined by a set of S-parameters stored in a Touchstone file or
by an equivalent circuit with lumped elements.
The same networks are available for embedding and deembedding.
De-embedding opens the configuration dialog and activates or deactivates deembedding.
Embedding opens the configuration dialog and activates or deactivates embedding.
Embedding/Deembedding
Selects a 2-port transformation network for (de-)embedding, defines its parameters, assigns it to a
physical port and enables (de-)embedding. The two dialogs for deembedding and embedding are identical
except for their inverse effect.
The dialogs contain the following control elements:
Port is the analyzer port for the added or removed circuit. The transformation networks are
defined such that the analyzer test port is connected to the left of the circuit; the DUT port is on
the right side.
(De-)embed DUT enables or disables the (de-)embedding function.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
234
Transformation Network contains all available 2-port networks (see below). Networks are either
defined by lumped elements or by means of imported S-parameter data. The active network
appears in inverse colors. The element parameters (C, R, L) for the selected network are
displayed on the right side.
Read Data From File... is enabled as long as the 2-Port Data network is active. This network is
defined by its S-parameters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p). No additional parameters
are required.
Set to Ideal Through is enabled as long as the 2-Port Data network is active. An imported S-
parameter set is replaced by the S-parameters of an ideal through connection, which eliminates
the transformation network.
Circuit models for 2-port networks
The lumped element 2-port transformation networks for (de-)embedding consist of the following two basic
circuit blocks:
A capacitor C connected in parallel with a resistor.
An inductor L connected in series with a resistor.
The 2-port transformation networks comprise all possible combinations of 2 basic blocks, where one block
represents a serial, the other a shunt element. In the default setting the resistors are not effective, since
the serial Rs are set to 0 V, the shunt Rs are set to 10 MV.
The first network is defined by its S-parameters stored in an imported two-port Touchstone file
(*.s2p). No additional parameters are required.
The following networks are composed of a serial C or L (as seen from the test port), followed by a shunt C
or L. They are named Serial C, Shunt C / Serial C, Shunt L / Serial L, Shunt C / Serial L, Shunt L.
The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L (as seen from the analyzer port), followed
by a serial C or L. They are named Shunt C, Serial C / Shunt C, Serial L / Shunt L, Serial C /
Shunt L, Serial L.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
235
Remote
control:
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETwork:SENDed...
MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt>
'<file_name>'
MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt> '<file_name>'
Cal Manager
Opens a dialog to store system error correction and power correction data to the cal pool and to assign
stored correction data to channels.
Cal pool
The cal pool is a collection of correction data sets (cal groups) that the analyzer stores in a common
directory C:\Rohde&Schwarz\NWA\Calibration\Data. Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different
channels and setups. Each cal group is stored in a separate file named <CalGroup_name>.cal. The cal
group name can be changed in the Calibration Manager dialog.
The Calibration Manager dialog contains three main panels:
Calibration State lists all channels and their current calibration state.
Calibration Pool contains a list of all stored correction data sets.
Calibration Properties displays the basic channel settings, the System Error Correction Data, and
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
236
the Power Correction Data available for the channel selection in the Calibration State panel.
Calibration states
One of the following calibration states is assigned to each of the channels listed in the Cal State table:
No Calibration No specific channel correction data is available. The factory system error correction
is used. This is the default situation when a new setup is created (Nwa-File New).
Channel Cal A system error correction and/or power correction with channel-specific correction
data is active. A new calibration of the channel affects the channel-specific correction data only.
Uses <CalGroup> A system error correction with one of the correction data sets (cal groups)
stored in the cal pool is active. A new calibration of the channel replaces the correction data in the
cal pool and may affect several channels, see below.
The channel calibration of the active channel is also applied to a new channel created via New Add Chan
+ Trace indicates that the system error correction for the channel has been deactivated using Correction
Off.
If a new calibration is performed for a channel assigned to a cal group (marked as Uses <CalGroup>),
the correction data overwrites the cal group data, so the new calibration will affect all channels
assigned to the cal group. The network analyzer generates a notice message "New calibration will
overwrite cal pool!" when opening the first dialog of the calibration wizard.
The buttons in the upper half of the dialog are used to modify the Cal Pool and apply pool data to
channels:
Copy >> copies the correction data (Channel Cal) of the selected channel to the cal pool,
generating a new pool member (cal group).
Apply assigns the selected cal group to the selected channel.
Apply All assigns the selected cal group to all channels in the Cal State table.
Resolve Pool Link deletes the assignment between the selected channel (Ch<n>: Uses
<CalGroup_name>) and the cal group. The correction data from the cal group <CalGroup_name>
is used as a channel calibration for <Ch1>, the Calibration State list displays Ch<n>: Channel Cal.
Delete From Pool deletes the selected cal group.
You can apply any correction data set (cal group) from the Cal Pool to several channels, which may
belong to different setups. When doing make sure that the port configuration of the channels
(connectors, state, ...) and the cal group are compatible.
You can also use a cal group stored in the Cal Pool to define a channel-specific calibration. Apply
the cal group to the channel and click Resolve Pool Link.
Remote
control:
MMEMory:STORe:CORRection <Ch>, "<file_name>"
MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection <Ch>, "<file_name>"
MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:RESolve <Ch>, "<file_name>"
MMEMory:DELete
"C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Data\<file_name>"
MMEMory:DELete:CORRection "<file_name>"
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATE?
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter?
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:SSTate?
Recall Last Cal Set
Loads and activates the setup for which the last calibration was performed. If the last calibrated
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
237
setup is already active, nothing is changed.
The calibrated setups are automatically stored in the
C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\RecallSets directory. A message box pops up if the directory is
empty, e.g. because no calibration was performed yet.
Automatic Calibration (Procedure)
A Calibration Unit is an integrated solution for automatic system error correction of vector network
analyzers. For an overview of available types refer to section Automatic Calibration (Introduction). The use
of the calibration units is described below.
Attention!
Please observe the safety instructions in the "Technical Information"
provided with the calibration unit to avoid any damage to the unit and the
network analyzer. Safety-related aspects of the connection and
operation of the units are also reported in the sections below.
Connecting the Calibration Unit to the Network Analyzer
The calibration unit provides two N 75 V (f) connectors.
To connect the unit...
Switch on and start-up your network analyzer.
To protect your equipment against ESD damage use the wrist strap and grounding cord supplied with
the instrument and connect yourself to ground. GND
Connect the USB type A connector of the USB cable to any of the USB type A connectors on the front
panel of the analyzer. Connect the USB type B connector of the USB cable to the USB type B
connector of the calibration unit. You can also connect the unit before switching on the analyzer.
Wait until the operating system has recognized and initialized the new hardware. When the unit is
connected for the first time, this may take longer than in normal use.
The unit is ready to be used, see Performing an Automatic Calibration below.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
238
Note:
The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to ZVB network
analyzers following the procedure described above. You can also connect the
unit before switching on the analyzer. Do not connect the unit to other USB
hosts, e.g. a PC, or insert any USB hubs between the analyzer and the unit,
as this may cause damage to the unit or the host.
You can connect only one calibration unit at a time. However, you can
simultaneously connect a cal unit and another device (mouse, USB memory
stick etc.) to the USB connectors of the analyzer.
An unused calibration unit may remain connected to the USB port while the
network analyzer is performing measurements. It must be disconnected
during a firmware update.
It is safe to connect or disconnect the calibration unit while the network
analyzer is operating. Never connect or disconnect the unit while data is
being transferred between the analyzer and the unit. Never connect the unit
during a firmware update.
Performing an Automatic Calibration
After connection and initialization, you can use the calibration unit as follows:
Connect the analyzer ports you wish to calibrate (one/two ports for a one/two-port calibration) to
arbitrary ports of the calibration unit. If you connect just one cal unit port, terminate the other port with
a 50 V match.
Perform the automatic calibration for the selected number of ports using the S-Parameter Wizard or
the Start Calibration menu.
Remove the test cables from the unit, connect your DUT instead and perform calibrated
measurements.
The assignment between the analyzer ports and the cal unit ports is detected automatically. If auto-
detection fails (e.g. because of a high attenuation in the signal path), connect matching port numbers and
click Default Port Assignment at the beginning of the calibration process.
Accuracy considerations
To ensure an accurate calibration, please observe the following items:
Unused ports of the calibration unit must be terminated with a 50 V match.
No adaptors must be inserted between the calibration unit and the test ports.
After connecting the unit to the USB port, allow for a sufficient warm-up time (see
"Specifications") before starting the calibration.
Highest accuracy is achieved if the input power at the cal unit ports is approx. 10 dBm. This
corresponds to the source power of the R&S ZVL after a preset of the instrument. If the test
setup contains a large attenuation, increase the source power to compensate for the
attenuation.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
239
Attention!
The maximum RF input power of the calibration unit is beyond the
RF output power range of the analyzer, so there is no risk of
damage if the device is directly connected to the test ports. If you
use an external power amplifier, make sure that the maximum RF
input power of the calibration unit quoted in the data sheet is never
exceeded.
The calibration type depends on the number of ports. If a single port is calibrated, the analyzer uses full
one-port calibration. For 2 ports, the analyzer provides the following options:
A TOSM calibration for the two ports.
One or two full one-port calibrations.
Remote
control
:
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection?
Calibration Procedure
The automatic calibration is started on clicking Calibration Unit in the Start Calibration menu. The
Calibration Unit dialog shows the parameters of the cal unit, the port assignment, and the progress of the
calibration procedure.
In the dialog, you can:
Detect the current Port Assignment between the analyzer and the connected calibration unit.
Restore the Default Port Assignment (port 1 / 2 of the analyzer to port 1 / 2 of the cal unit). This is
important if the automatic detection of the port assignment fails.
Start the necessary calibration sweeps. The calibration is started automatically if automatic port
detection is successful and the cal unit temperature is within the validity range.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
240
Restore the Default Port Assignment (port 1 / 2 of the analyzer to port 1 / 2 of the cal unit). This is
important if the automatic detection of the port assignment fails.
Start the necessary calibration sweeps. The calibration is started automatically if automatic port
detection is successful and the cal unit temperature is within the validity range.
Abort an ongoing calibration sweep.
The Calibration Unit dialog is closed automatically when all standards have been measured, the system
error correction data has been calculated, and the result is applied to the active channel. The network
analyzer is ready to perform calibrated measurements.
If you accidentally connect a calibration unit which is no suited for R&S ZVL network analyzers
(e.g. one of the cal unit types for R&S ZVA/B analyzers) the analyzer generates an error message,
stating that the characterization of the cal unit is not sufficient.
Remote
control
:
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess:ALL?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL:CONNection
SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL:MMEMory[:STATe]
MMEMory:AKAL:FACTory:CONVersion
Cal Kits
Opens a dialog to manage the calibration kits in use, add new kits and import or export kits.
Calibration kits
A calibration kit is a set of physical calibration standards for a particular connector type. The magnitude
and phase response of the calibration standards (i.e. their S-parameters) must be known or predictable
within a given frequency range.
The standards are grouped into several types (open, through, match,...) corresponding to the different
input quantities for the analyzer's error models. The standard type also determines the equivalent circuit
model used to describe its properties. The circuit model depends on several parameters that are stored in
the cal kit file associated with the calibration kit.
As an alternative to using circuit models, it is possible to describe the standards by means of S-parameter
tables stored in a file.
The analyzer provides a large number of predefined cal kits but can also import cal kit files and create new
kits:
A selection of predefined kits with different types of parameters is available for all connector types.
The parameters of these kits are displayed in the Add/Modify Standards dialog, however, it is not
possible to change or delete the kits.
Imported and user-defined kits can be changed in the Calibration Kits dialog and its various sub-
dialogs.
Calibration kits and connector types are global resources; the parameters are stored independently and
available irrespective of the current setup.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
241
The Calibration Kits dialog contains a series of buttons, each of them opening a dialog:
Import Kit imports a cal kit file containing the parameters for a new calibration kit. It is possible to
load several kits, so the analyzer asks whether to set the imported calibration kit active.
Add Kit combines different standards to form a new calibration kit.
View/ Modify Kit adds or deletes standards in an imported or user-defined calibration kit and/or
changes their parameters.
Copy Kit to... creates a copy of the selected calibration kit. The cal kit data is stored in the internal
memory and can be exported to a cal kit file using Export Kit.
Delete Kit removes an imported or user-defined kit from the list of Calibration Kits in Use.
Export Kit exports calibration kit data to a cal kit file.
Avail Conn Types adds or deletes connector types.
The Calibration Kits in Use: table is used to select a calibration kit for each connector type. The pull-down
lists contain all kits for the individual connector types.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:SELect '<ckit_name>'
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:SELect '<conn_type>', '<ckit_name>'
Cal Kit Parameter Types
The analyzer uses three types of parameters to describe the calibration standards. The parameter type is
the same for all standards in a kit and therefore annexed to the kit name:
Universal parameters (no label) describe calibration kit models with highly standardized
components so that the parameters are valid for all calibration kits of the model.
Typical parameters (labelled typical) approximately describe a calibration kit model. To correct for
deviations between the standards, each kit of the model is individually measured and delivered
with an additional, kit-specific parameter set. Therefore each typical parameter set <kit_name>
typical is complemented by an additional parameter set <kit_name> containing optimized
parameters for an individual kit.
Ideal parameters (labelled Ideal Kit) describe an idealized calibration kit for each connector type;
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
242
see below.
Make sure to use universal or individual parameter sets if you need to obtain high-precision results.
The precision of the calibration kit parameters determine the accuracy of the system error correction and
of the measurements. The calibration wizard displays a warning if you use a typical or ideal parameter set
to calibrate a channel.
Calibration kits can be obtained as network analyzer accessories; refer to the data sheet for the relevant
ordering information. The name of all parameter sets is equal to the name of the corresponding calibration
kit model.
Ideal parameters
All ideal kits contain the following standards:
Standard (Gender) R (Load) Electrical Length (Offset)
Open (f, m) V 0 mm (Delay: 0 s)
Short (f, m) 0 V 0 mm
Offset Short (f, m) 0 V 10 mm
Match (f, m) Z0 (reference impedance of the connector type) 0 mm
Sliding Match (f, m) 0 mm
Reflect (f, m) V 0 mm
Through (ff, mm, mf) 0 mm
Line (ff, mm, mf) 10 mm
Attenuation (ff, mm , mf) 0 mm
Symm. Network (ff, mm, mf) 0 mm
The following additional parameters are used:
Characteristic impedance: Z
0
(reference impedance of the connector type)
Loss: 0 dB / sqrt(GHz) (0 GV / s)
All inductance and capacitance parameters are set to zero.
Cal Kit Files
Calibration kit files can be used to store the parameters of a particular calibration kit, to reuse the data and
to exchange calibration kits from one network analyzer to another.
Cal kit file contents
Cal kit files are independent of the current setup and contain the following information:
Name and label of the calibration kit
Connector type including all connector type parameters (name, polarity, offset model, reference
impedance)
Type, gender and label of all standards in the kit together with the circuit model parameters
(offsets, load) or S-parameter tables (.snp file) that are necessary to determine its magnitude and
phase response.
To export cal kit data, the analyzer uses a specific binary file format *.calkit.
Three different import file formats are supported: ZVL-specific binary cal kit files (*.calkit), ZVR-
specific binary cal kit files (*.ck), cal kit files in Agilent-specific ASCII formats (*.csv, *.prn; see
notes below).
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
243
By default cal kit files are stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits directory.
To import a ZVL-specific or ZVR-specific cal kit file (*.ck or *.calkit) you can also use the Windows
Explorer and simply double-click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application. The imported
cal kit file is automatically set active.
Importing older ZVR cal kit files
On loading some older ZVR-specific *.ck files, e.g. the ZV-Z23 cal kit file, the ZVL generates the
message File does not comply with instrument calibration kit file format. The files must be
converted using a ZVR network analyzer equipped with a firmware version V3.52 or higer. Proceed
as follows:
On the ZVR, press CAL CAL KITS MODIFY KITS INSTALL NEW KIT to import the *.ck
file.
Press CREATE INST FILE in the same submenu to export the *.ck file in a ZVL-compatible
format.
Import the converted file into the ZVL.
*.csv cal kit files: VNA Cal Kit Manager 2.1
The VNA Cal Kit Manager is a free, Windows-based software tool intended to import, edit, and
export *csv cal kit files. The software is available for download at
http://www.vnahelp.com/products.html. The decimal separator used by the VNA Cal Kit Manager
V2.1 depends on the language version of the Windows operating system: Cal kit files generated on
an English operating system contain dots, the ones generated on a German system contain
commas.
The network analyzer expects the dot as a separator and displays an error message when a *.csv
file with commas is loaded. Please install the VNA Cal Kit Manager V2.1 on an appropriate (e.g.
Englisch) Windows version to avoid trouble.
*.prn cal kit files: PNA Cal Kit Editor
The network analyzer can import and process cal kit files created with the PNA Cal Kit Editor. The
files use the extension *.prn; the data format is identical to the *.csv format.
The decimal separator used by the PNA Cal Kit Editor depends on the language version of the
Windows operating system: Cal kit files generated on an English operating system contain dots,
the ones generated on a German system contain commas.
The network analyzer expects the dot as a separator and displays an error message when a *.prn
file with commas is loaded. Please install the PNA Cal Kit Editor on an appropriate (e.g. Englisch)
Windows version to avoid trouble.
Remote control: MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT "file_name"
MMEMory:STORe:CKIT "kit_name", "file_name"
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:INSTall "<file_name>"
Add or View / Modify Calibration Kit
Combines different standards to form a new calibration kit, assigning a connector type and further
attributes (name, labels). This dialog is opened from the Calibration Kits dialog: If the Add Kit... button is
selected, the dialog title is Add Calibration Kit; if the View / Modify Kit... button is selected, the dialog title is
View / Modify Calibration Kit. The functionality of both dialog versions is the same.
If Add Kit is used for a predefined calibration kit, the View / Modify Standard... button can be used to
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
244
open the View / Modify Standard in <kit_name> dialog check the standard parameters. All other
controls are inactive.
In its upper part the Add or View / Modify Calibration Kit dialog contains several controls to do the
following:
Select a predefined or user-defined Connector Type.
Insert the (unique) Name of the new kit and assign a Label.
Qualify whether or not the Offset and Load parameters for the standards are defined and
displayed in Agilent Mode.
Assigning a label to user-defined calibration kits is optional. However, the label is displayed in many
dialogs and can provide useful information about the kit, e.g. its serial number.
The table in the center of the dialog lists all standards in the new kit together with either their gender or
their port assignment (see Restrict Port Assignment) and the label (if defined). Clicking a standard opens
the View / Modify Standard in <kit_name> dialog where it is possible to change the parameters. Four
buttons can be used to change the entries in the list.
Copy Standards from... opens a dialog to copy standards from another calibration kit to the new
kit.
Add Standard... selects, defines and adds a new standard to the kit. A calibration kit may only
contain a single standard of each type.
View / Modify Standard... displays or changes the properties of the selected standard.
Delete Standard removes the selected standard from the list and from the calibration kit.
Use Copy Standards from... to avoid the (re-)definition of their properties. Standards are copied
together with their parameters and their label, which you can modify once they belong to the new kit.
Copy Standards from
Copies standards together with their parameters from a calibration kit in use to a new calibration kit. This
dialog is opened from the View Calibration Kit dialog (Copy Standards from... button).
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
245
In the dialog, it is possible to select one of the calibration kits in use (Kit Name) and select either all or a
single standard to be copied. A calibration kit may only contain a single standard of each type.
Available Connector Types
Displays and modifies the list of available connector types. This dialog is opened from the Calibration Kits
dialog (Avail Conn Types... button).
The list shows the available connector types with their name (Conn Type), polarity (Sexless) and
reference impedance (Ref Imp). The Offset Model describes the mode of wave propagation in the
transmission lines of the standards associated with the connector type. The buttons below are used to add
and delete user-defined connector types. Deleting a connector type will also delete all calibration or
adapter kits assigned to it.
Impact of reference impedance
The reference impedance (Ref Imp) Z
0
for the connectors is a critical value that represents an input value
for various parameter conversions. Z
0
enters into:
The calculation of the S-parameters for the calibration standards associated with the connector
type, provided that they are derived from a circuit model (Add/Modify Standard dialog).
The calculation of impedance and admittance parameters.
Storing connector type settings
Calibration kits and connector types are global resources; the parameters are stored independently and
available irrespective of the current setup. The connector type settings are always stored together with the
associated calibration kit parameters. It is possible to export and import the connector settings using
Export Kit... and Import Kit... in the Calibration Kits dialog.
The name, polarity and reference impedance of a user-defined connector can be changed in the table.
The button in the Offset Model column opens the Offset Model dialog to define the propagation mode in
detail.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
246
After assigning a calibration or adapter kit to a user-defined connector type, you can still change its
name, offset model and reference impedance. Switching between sexed and sexless will delete all
kits assigned to the connector type.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete
Offset Model Dialog
Defines the mode of wave propagation in the lines of the standards associated with the connector type.
This dialog is opened from the Available Connector Types dialog ( button in the table).
The Parameters to be selected depend on the Line Type:
If the calibration kit standards contain lines with transverse electric propagation mode (TEM), then
the Relative Permittivity ]
r
of the dielectric can be defined. The default permittivity is the value for
air. TEM-type lines have not cutoff frequency.
If the calibration kit standards contain waveguides, then the lowest frequency where a wave
propagation is possible (Cutoff Frequency f
c
) can be defined. The default cutoff frequency if 0 Hz
(propagation at all frequencies). No relative permittivity is needed for waveguides.
The impedance for waveguides is frequency-dependent. If a waveguide line type is selected, various
dialogs (e.g. Add Standard...) will indicate varies instead of a definite impedance value.
Impact of offset model parameters
The offset model parameters are used for the calculation of the S-parameters for the calibration standards
associated with the connector type, provided that they are derived from a circuit model (Add/Modify
Standard dialog).
For TEM-type lines, the relative permittivity ]
r
is needed for the conversion of and ZVR-type Loss
(in units of dB/sqrt(GHz)) into an Agilent-type Offset Loss (in units of GV/s) and vice versa (see
Offset andLoad parameters). The Electrical Length and Delay values in the Modify Offset dialog
are directly entered and therefore independent of ]
r
.
For waveguides, the low frequency cutoff frequency f
c
is important because no wave propagation
is possible at frequencies below f
c
. If a standard is measured in order to acquire calibration data,
the analyzer checks the low frequency cutoff. If the start frequency of the sweep range is below f
c
, then the calibration wizard generates and error message.
The offset model parameters are not used except in the context of calibration. The offset
parameterdefinitions (seeMechanical Length) are based on independent ]
r
values.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
247
Add or View / Modify Standard
Defines, displays or modifies the properties of the calibration standards in a particular calibration kit. This
dialog is opened from the Add or View / Modify Calibration Kit dialog (Add Standard... or View / Modify
Standard... buttons). Depending on the title, some control elements may not be active.
For an overview of calibration standards and their properties refer to section Calibration standard
types below.
In its upper part the Add Standard or View / Modify Standard dialog contains several controls to do the
following:
Select a standard Type and its Gender (for polarized/not sexless connector types and if the port
assignment is not restricted) and assign a Label.
Restrict Port Assignment
Select S-Params From
Qualify whether the standard is described by a Circuit Model from which the analyzer can
calculate the S-parameters or by a table of measured or simulated S-parameters stored in a
Touchstone file. Pressing the Read Data from File... button opens a file selection dialog where the
appropriate file type (*.s1p for one-port standards and *.s2p for two-port standards) is
automatically selected.
The Sliding Match and Attenuation are special standard types which must be described by a
circuit model. The controls in the S-Params From panel are disabled.
For two-port standards described by a *.s2p file, the implicit ports 1 and 2 (given by the order of S-
parameters Re(S11) Im(S11) Re(S21) Im(S21) Re(S12) Im(S12) Re(S22) Im(S22) in the
file) are assigned to the test ports that the analyzer actually calibrates as follows: Port 1 is always
assigned to the lower-numbered calibrated test port, port 2 to the other (higher-numbered)
calibrated test port.
Assigning a label to standards is optional. However, the label is displayed in many dialogs and can
provide useful information about the standard, e.g. its serial number.
If Circuit Model is selected in the S-params From panel, then the controls in the central panel of the dialog
are enabled. The circuit diagram is adjusted to the selected standard type. The following parameters can
be set:
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
248
Frequency range (Min. Freq. to Max. Freq) for which the circuit model is valid. During calibration,
the analyzer checks whether the sweep range is contained in the validity range of all measured
standards and possibly generates a warning (see Measure Standards dialog).
Offset and Load parameters of the circuit model.
The impedance for waveguides is frequency-dependent. If a waveguide line type is selected in the
Offset Model dialog, the circuit model indicates varies instead of a definite impedance value.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<std_type>
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:<std_type>
MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:SDATa
Restrict Port Assignment
Opens a dialog to define whether the standard can be connected to any port of the analyzer or to just one
port (for one-port standards) or a pair of ports (for two-port standards).
The port assignment is displayed in the Add or View / Modify Calibration Kit dialogs.
Port assignment and gender
The standards are handled differently, depending on their port assignment:
If the port assignment is not restricted, the gender belongs to the definition of polarized standards.
When the connector type and calibration kit is selected in the calibration wizard, the analyzer
checks whether the kit contains the necessary standard types and whether the standards have
the right gender.
Standards with restricted port assignment are assumed to have the right gender (the one required
for this port). In the View Modify Standard dialog, the Gender: input field is disabled. In the
calibration wizard, the analyzer checks whether the kit contains the necessary standard types for
the required ports. Instead of the gender, the port assignment is stored in the calibration kit file.
This approach simplifies the definition of standards and helps to avoid inconsistencies.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<std_type>
Modify Offset
Specifies the offset parameters for the transmission lines of a particular calibration standard. This dialog is
opened from the Add or View / Modify Standard... dialog (Modify Offset... button).
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
249
The offset parameters depend on whether or not the circuit model is defined in Agilent Mode (see
Add/Modify Calibration Kit dialog):
If Agilent Mode is active, then the standard is characterized by its Delay (in s), its characteristic
impedance Z
0
(in V) and its Offset Loss (in GV/s).
If Agilent Mode is switched off, then the standard is characterized by the ZVR-compatible
parameters Electrical Length (in m or foot (ft), depending on the Distance Unit selected in the
System Configuration dialog), its Char. Impedance (in V) and its Loss (in dB/sqrt(GHz)). The loss
is zero and not editable as long as the electrical length is zero.
Both parameter sets are closely related. The Electrical Length is proportional to the Delay; Z
0
corresponds
to the Char. Impedance. Moreover the analyzer converts an Agilent-type Offset Loss into a ZVR-type Loss
and vice versa using the Relative Permittivity N
r
for the connector type defined in the Offset Model... dialog.
Offset parameters
The offset parameters have the following physical meaning:
The Delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the standard. The Electrical Length
is equal to the Delay times the speed of light in the vacuum and is a measure for the length of
transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane. For a waveguide with
permittivity N
r
and mechanical length L
mech
the following relations hold:
The default delay is 0 s, the default step width is 1 ns, corresponding to a step width of 299.792 mm
for the electrical length. The relations hold for one-port and 2-port standards.
Z
0
is the Characteristic Impedance of thestandard. If the standard is terminated with Z
0
, then its
input impedance is also equal to Z
0
. Z
0
is not necessarily equal to the reference impedance of the
system (depending on the Connector Type) or the terminal impedance of the standard. The
characteristic impedance of the standard is only used in the context of calibration.
The default characteristic impedance is equal to the reference impedance of the system.
The Loss is the energy loss along the transmission line due to the skin effect. For resistive lines
and at RF frequencies the loss is approximately proportional to the square root of the frequency.
In Agilent mode the Offset Loss is expressed in units of V/s at a frequency of 1 GHz. The following
formula holds:
To determine an offset loss value experimentally, measure the delay in seconds and the loss in dB
at 1 GHz and use the formula above.
The default Loss or Offset Loss is zero.
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
250
The impedance for waveguides is frequency-dependent. If a waveguide line type is selected in the
Offset Model dialog, the Char. Impedance field is disabled and indicates "varies" instead of a
definite impedance value. Moreover no Loss or Offset Loss can be set.
Offset parameters and standard types
Offset parameters are used to describe all types of standards except the Sliding Match and the
Attenuation.
The Sliding Match is a one-port standard with variable load parameters (sliding load) and
unspecified length. The reference impedance is fixed and equal to the characteristic impedance of
the connector type. No load and offset parameters need to be set.
The Attenuation is a two-port standard which is fully matched in both directions (the reflection
factor at both ports is zero). No load and offset parameters need to be set.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:<std_type>
Modify Load
Specifies the load parameters for a particular calibration standard describing its terminal impedance. This
dialog is opened from the Add or View / Modify Standard... dialog (Modify Load... button).
The circuit model for the load consists of capacitance C which is connected in parallel to an inductance L
and a resistance R, both connected in series.
R is the constant resistive contribution. It is possible to select a special value (Open for so
that the inductance coefficients are irrelevant, Short for 0 V, Match for the reference impedance of
the current connector type) or set any resistance R.
The fringing capacitance C and the residual inductance L are both assumed to be frequency-
dependent and approximated by the first four terms of the Taylor series around f = 0 Hz.
Load parameters and standard types
Load parameters are used to describe all types of standards except a Through, a Sliding Match, aLineand
an Attenuation.
The Through standard is a through-connection between two ports with minimum loss which is
taken into account by the Offset Parameters.
The Sliding Match is a one-port standard with variable load parameters (sliding load), so there is
no fixed load model.
The Line standard is a line of variable length with minimum loss which is taken into account by the
Offset Parameters.
The Attenuation is a two-port standard which is fully matched in both directions (the reflection
R&S ZVL GUI Reference
Channel Menu
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-06
251
factor at both ports is zero). No load and offset parameters need to be set.
Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:<std_type>
Calibration Standard Types
The following table gives an overview of the different standards and their offset and load models:
Standard
Type
Characteristics Ideal Standard Offset
Model
Load
Model
Open Open circuit (one-port) V
Short Short circuit (one-port) 0 V
Offset short Short circuit with added electrical length offset, for
waveguide calibration (one-port)
0 V
Match Matched broadband termination (one-port) Z0 (reference impedance
of the connector type)
Sliding
match
One-port standard consisting of an air line with a
movable, low-reflection load element (sliding load). .
Reflect Unknown mismatched standard (one-port) V
Through Through-connection with minimum loss (two-port)
Line1, Line 2 Line(s) for TRL calibration with minimum loss (two-
port)
Attenuation Fully matched standard in both directions (two-port;
the reflection factor at both ports is zero).
Symm.
network
Unknown mismatched reflection-symmetric standard
(two-port)
span*n/200, x
i
+ span*n/200], and that the result of i is replaced by the
arithmetic mean value of all measurement points in this interval. [%]
*RST value 1
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
*RST; CALC:SMO ON
Activate smoothing for the default trace.
CALC:SMO:APER 0.5
Reduce the smoothing aperture to 0.5 %.
CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing[:STATe] <Boolean>
Enables or disables smoothing for trace no. <Chn>.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Smoothing on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SMOothing:APERture
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
403
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics...
This subsystem evaluates and displays statistical and phase information of the trace.
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER <numeric_value>
Selects one out of 10 evaluation ranges to be configured with the
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STARt and
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP commands.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. If unspecified the numeric
suffix is set to 1.
<numeric_value> Number of the evaluation range.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 10. In addition, 0 denotes the (non-configurable) Full Span evaluation
range. []
*RST value 0
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
*RST; CALC:STAT:DOM:USER?
Query the default evaluation range. The response is zero, i.e. the evaluation
range is equal to the complete sweep range
CALC:STAT:DOM:USER 1; :CALC:STAT:DOM:USER:STARt 1GHZ; STOP 2GHZ
Select evaluation range no. 1 and define the evaluation range between 1
GHz and 2 GHz.
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STARt <numeric_value>
Defines the start value of the evaluation range selected via
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<numeric_value> Start value of the evaluation range.
Range [def. unit] 1000 GHz to 999.999999999 GHz. [Hz]
*RST value Lowest frequency of the analyzer, depending on the analyzer model.
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP <numeric_value>
Defines the stop value of the evaluation range selected via
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<numeric_value> Stop value of the evaluation range.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
404
Range [def. unit] 999.999999999 GHz to 1000 GHz. [Hz]
*RST value Highest frequency of the analyzer, depending on the analyzer model.
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean>
Displays or hides the Phase Delay/El Length results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:[:STATe]
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean>
Displays or hides the Min/Max/Peak-Peak results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:[:STATe]
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDev[:STATe] <Boolean>
Displays or hides the Mean/Std Dev results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:[:STATe]
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
405
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? MEAN | STDDev | MAX | MIN | RMS | PTPeak
| ELENgth | PDELay | ALL
Returns a single statistical parameters of the trace no. <Chn> or all parameters. It is not necessary to
display the info field (CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] ON) before using this command.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
Parameters MEAN Return arithmetic mean value of all response values of the trace in the
entire sweep range (or in the evaluation range defined in manual control)
STDDev Return standard deviation of all response values
MAX Return the maximum of all response values
MIN Return the minimum of all response values
RMS Return the root mean square of all response values
PTPeak Return the peak-to-peak value (MAX MIN)
ELENgth Return the electrical length
PDELay Return the phase delay
ALL Return all statistical values, observing the order used above
Range [def.
unit]
The data is returned as a comma-separated list of real numbers. The unit is the
default unit of the measured parameter; see
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine but also depends on the trace format
(linear or logarithmic scale, see CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat). If a polar trace format
is selected, then the statistical parameters are calculated from the linear magnitude
of the measurement parameter. []
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only.
Example:
*RST; CALC:STAT:RES? MAX
Calculate and return the maximum of the default trace showing an S-parameter on a
dB Mag scale.
:CALC:FORM POL; STAT:RES? MAX
Display the trace in a polar diagram and re-calculate the maximum. The result
corresponds to the previous result but is converted to a unitless linear value.
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RMS[:STATe] <Boolean>
Displays or hides the RMS results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:[:STATe]
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
406
CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] <Boolean>
Displays or hides all statistical results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>.
You can display or hide the Min/Max/Peak-Peak, Mean/Std Dev, RMS, and the Phase Delay/El
Length results separately; see example below.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
*RST; CALC:STAT:MMPT ON
Reset the instrument, hiding all statistical results. Display the Min/Max/Peak-
Peak results.
CALC:STAT:MSTD ON
Display the Mean/Std Dev results in addition.
CALC:STAT:RMS ON
Display the RMS results in addition.
CALC:STAT:EPD ON
Display the Phase Delay/El Length results in addition.
CALC:STAT OFF
Hide all results.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform...
This subsystem converts measured data from one representation to another and controls the
transformation into the time domain (with option ZVL-K3, Time Domain).
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:COMPlex S | Y | Z
Converts S-parameters into matched-circuit (converted) Y-parameters or Z-parameters and vice versa,
assuming that port no. i is terminated with Z
0i
so that the three parameter sets are equivalent and the
following formulas apply:
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
407
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. If unspecified the numeric
suffix is set to 1.
S | Y | P S-parameters, Y-parameters, Z-parameters
*RST value (The initial representation of the trace is determined by means of
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example: *RST; CALC:PAR:MEAS 'Trc1'", '"Y-S22'
Select the converted admittance Y<S22 as measurement parameter of the
default trace.
CALC:TRAN:COMP S
Convert the converted Y-parameter into an S-parameter.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer <numeric_value>
Defines the center time of the diagram in time domain.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Center time of the diagram in time domain
Range [def. unit] -99.99999999999 s to +99.99999999999 s. The increment (parameters UP
or DOWN) is 0.1 ns. [s]
*RST value 1.5E-009 s
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
*RST; CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON
Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and enable the time
domain transformation for the default trace.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:CENT 0; SPAN 5ns
Set the center time to 0 ns and the time span to 5 ns.
Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis
DISTance), then the center value is entered in m or foot (ft), depending on the Distance Unit
selected in the System Configuration dialog. The range and default value changes accordingly.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:DCHebyshev <numeric_value>
Sets the sideband suppression for the Dolph-Chebyshev window. The command is only available if a
Dolph-Chebyshev window is active (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow DCHebyshev).
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
408
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Sideband suppression
Range [def. unit] 10 dB to 120 dB. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 10 dB. [dB]
*RST value 32 dB
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; CALC:TRAN:TIME:WIND DCH
Reset the instrument and select a Dolph-Chebyshev window for filtering the
data in the frequency domain.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:DCH 25
Set the sideband suppression to 25 dB.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs KFSTop | KDFRequency |
KSDFRequency
Calculates the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms according to one of the three alternative
algorithms.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters KFSTop Keep stop frequency and number of points
KDFRequency Keep frequency gap and number of points
KSDFRequency Keep stop frequency and approximate frequency gap
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query (the command causes an event)
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE]
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam <numeric_value>
Defines the DC value for low pass transforms. The command is enabled only if the sweep points are on a
harmonic grid (to be set explicitly or using CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs).
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> DC value of the measured quantity
Range [def. unit] Depending on the measured quantity (1 to +1 for S-parameters)
*RST value 0
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON
Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep with S
21
as measured quantity, and enable the time domain
transformation for the default trace.
CALC:TRAN:TIME LPAS; TIME:STIM STEP
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
409
Select a low pass step transformation.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS KFST
Calculate a harmonic grid, keeping the stop frequency and the number of
points.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS:DCSP 0.2
Set the DC value.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS:DCSP:EXTR; CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS:DCSP?
Extrapolate the measured trace, overwrite the defined DC value, and query the
new value.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS:DCSP:CONT ON
Switch over to continuous extrapolation (e.g. because you noticed a
discrepancy between the manually entered DC value and the extrapolation and
assume the extrapolation to be more trustworthy).
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:CONTinuous <Boolean>
Determines whether continuous extrapolation for the DC value is enabled.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<Boolean> ON Continuous extrapolation enabled
OFF Continuous extrapolation disabled
*RST value OFF []
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:EXTRapolate
Extrapolates the measured trace towards f = 0 and overwrites the current DC value
(CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam). The command is relevant for low pass time
domain transforms.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters None
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query (the command causes an event)
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPFRequency
Calculates the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms, keeping the stop frequency and the
number of points.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
410
Use CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs if you wish to use one of the other algorithms for
calculating the grid.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters None
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query (the command causes an event)
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE]
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN <numeric_value>
Defines the time span of the diagram in time domain.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Time span of the diagram in time domain.
Range [def. unit] 2E-012 s to 200 s. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 0.1 ns. [s]
*RST value 5E-009 s
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer
Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis
DISTance), then the span is entered in m; the range and default value changes accordingly.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt <numeric_value>
Defines the start time of the diagram in time domain.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Start time of the diagram.
Range [def. unit] 100 s to +99.999999999998 s. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is
0.1 ns. [s]
*RST value 1E-009 s
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
*RST; CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON
Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and enable the time
domain transformation for the default trace.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAR 0; STOP 10 ns
Set the start time to 0 ns and the stop time to 10 ns.
Note: If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency
(CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP), the stop frequency is set to the start frequency
plus the minimum frequency span (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN).
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
411
If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis
DISTance), then the start value is entered in m; the range and default value changes accordingly.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STATe <Boolean>
Determines whether the time domain transformation for trace no. <Chn> is enabled.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<Boolean> ON Time domain representation active
OFF Frequency domain representation active
*RST value OFF []
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
*RST; CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT?
Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and query whether the
default trace is displayed in the time domain. The response is 0.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus STEP | IMPulse
Selects the type of stimulus to be simulated in the low pass transformation process.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters IMPulse Impulse response, in bandpass or lowpass mode
STEP Step response, only in lowpass mode (a bandpass mode setting
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] BPASs is automatically changed
to lowpass)
*RST value IMP
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE]
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP <numeric_value>
Defines the stop time of the diagram in time domain.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Stop time of the diagram.
Range [def. unit] 99.999999999998 s to +100 s. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN)
is 0.1 ns. [s]
*RST value +4E-009 s
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
412
Note: If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency
(CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt), the start frequency is set to the stop frequency
minus the minimum frequency span (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN).
If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis
DISTance), then the stop value is entered in m; the range and default value changes accordingly.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] BPASs | LPASs
Selects the time domain transformation type.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters BPASs Band pass impulse (only impulse response; a step response
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus STEP is automatically
changed to impulse response)
LPASs Low pass (impulse or step response, depending on
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus setting)
*RST value BPASs
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
*RST; CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON
Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and
enable the time domain transformation for the default trace.
CALC:TRAN:TIME LPAS; TIME:STIM STEP
Select a low pass step transformation.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPAS KFST
Calculate a harmonic grid, keeping the stop frequency and the number of points.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow RECT | HAMMing | HANN | BOHMan |
DCHebyshev
Selects the window type for filtering the data in the frequency domain prior to the time domain
transformation.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters RECT No profiling (rectangle)
HANN Normal profile (Hann)
HAMMing Low first sidelobe (Hamming)
BOHMan Steep falloff (Bohman)
DCHebyshev Arbitrary sidelobes (Dolph-Chebychev)
*RST value HANN
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed (with some device-specific parameters), command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:DCHebychev
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
413
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis TIME | DISTance
Switches over between the x-axis scaling in time units or distance units.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
TIME x-axis scaled in time units
DISTance x-axis scaled in distance units (Distance = Time * c
0
* Velocity Factor)
*RST value OFF []
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON
Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and enable the time
domain transformation for the default trace.
CALC:TRAN:TIME:XAX DIST
Convert the x-axis scaling to distance units.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANSform:DTFault...
This subsystem controls the distance-to-fault measurement (with option ZVL-K2, Distance-to-Fault).
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer <distance>
Defines the center distance of the distance-to-fault diagram.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<distance> Center distance
Range [def. unit] 4.999 m to +9.999 m. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 1 mm. [m or
foot (ft), depending on the Distance Unit selected in the System Configuration
dialog]
*RST value 5 m
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
CALC:TRAN:DTF:CENT 3; SPAN 5
Define a distance range between 0.5 m and +5.5 m.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:STAR?; STOP?
Query the distance range. The response is 0.5;5.5.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:DTFault:DEFine '<cable name>', <permittivity>,
<attenuation>, <frequency>
Adds a new, user-defined cable.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
414
<Ch> Channel number. Note that the cable type is channel-specific (rather than
trace-specific).
'<cable name>' Cable name to identify the cable, string parameter
<permittivity> Permittivity of the cable
Range [def. unit] 1 to 100 []
*RST value
<attenuation> Attenuation per length unit
Range [def. unit] 0 dB/m to 1000 dB/m [dB/m or dB/ft, depending on the Distance Unit selected
in the System Configuration dialog]
*RST value
<frequency> Frequency reference for the attenuation value
Range [def. unit] 0 Hz to 6 GHz
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
CALC:TRAN:DTF:DEF 'User 1', 1.1, 0.2, 1GHz
Add a new cable named User 1 with permittivity 1.1 and an attenuation of 0.2
dB/m at 1 GHz.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:SEL 'User 1'
Select the added cable for the distance-to-fault measurement.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:DEL 'User 1'
Delete the added cable.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete '<cable name>'
Deletes a previously defined cable identified by its name.
<Ch> Channel number. Note that the cable type is channel-specific (rather than
trace-specific).
'<cable name>' Cable name used to identify the cable
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DEFine
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:COUNt?
Returns the number of peaks on the active distance trace which are above the fault limit
(CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold).
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Response Number of peaks, integer value
*RST value N/a
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, query only
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
415
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:DATA<nr>?
Returns the distance and peak response values of the detected fault no. <nr>. If the number of detected
faults (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:COUNt?) is smaller than <nr>, an error
message is returned.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<nr> Current number of the fault. Faults are numbered according to their distance
(fault no. 1 has the smallest distance)
Response Distance and peak response value of the fault, separated by a comma; see
example.
*RST value N/a
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, query only
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:STATe <Boolean>
Enables or disables the fault limit check.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit check on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold
Starts the automatic calculation of the number of points.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters N/a
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only
Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:DTF:STAT ON
Enable distance-to-fault measurement with default settings.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:PEAK:THR 20
Specify a fault limit of 20 dB relative tor the absolute maximum of the active trace
in channel 1.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
416
CALC:TRAN:DTF:PEAK:STAT ON
Enable the fault limit check for the active trace.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:PEAK:COUN?
Query the number of detected faults. The network analyzer responds with an
integer number, e.g. 2.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:PEAK:DATA2?
Query the distance and peak response values of the second detected fault.
Possible response: 0.09615384615,-18.07471664 (for a distance of
0.09615384615 units of length and a peak response value of -18.07471664 dB).
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:POINts
Starts the automatic calculation of the number of points.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
Parameters N/a
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect '<cable name>'
Selects a standard cable or a previously defined cable identified by its name.
<Ch> Channel number. Note that the cable type is channel-specific (rather than
trace-specific).
'<cable name>' Cable name used to identify the cable
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DEFine
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SPAN <numeric_value>
Defines the span of the distance-to-fault diagram.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Distance span
Range [def. unit] 1 mm to +15 m. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 1 mm. [m or foot
(ft), depending on the Distance Unit selected in the System Configuration
dialog]
*RST value 10 m
SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
417
Types
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt <numeric_value>
Defines the start distance of the distance-to-fault diagram.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Start distance
Range [def. unit] 5 m to +9.999 m. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 1 mm. [m or
foot (ft), depending on the Distance Unit selected in the System Configuration
dialog]
*RST value 0 m
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer
Note: If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency
(CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STOP), the stop frequency is set to the start
frequency plus the minimum frequency span (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SPAN).
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe <Boolean>
Enables or disables the distance-to-fault measurement. In contrast to manual control, the number of points
is not automatically re-adjusted (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:POINts).
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<Boolean> ON Distance-to-fault measurement active
OFF Distance-to-fault measurement active
*RST value OFF []
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; :CALC:TRAN:DTF:STAT ON; :SWE:POIN?
Enable distance-to-fault measurement with default settings. The number of
sweep points is equal to the default value 201.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:POIN; :SWE:POIN?
Adjust the number of sweep points to the default channel settings. For an R&S
ZVL network analyzer, the result is 519.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:STAR -1; STOP 5
Select a distance range between -1 m and +5 m.
CALC:TRAN:DTF:SEL 'RG214'
Select a RF214 cable type for the distance-to-fault measurement.
FREQ:SPAN 2GHz; :CALC:TRAN:DTF:POIN; :SWE:POIN?
Reduce the frequency span, re-calculate the number of points. The query
returns 201.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
418
CORR:COLL:METH:DEF 'DTF Cal', FOPort, 2
CORR:COLL:ACQ:SEL OPEN, 2
CORR:COLL:ACQ:SEL SHOR, 2
CORR:COLL:ACQ:SEL MATC, 2
CORR:COLL:SAVE:SEL
Perform a full one-port calibration for the distance-to-fault measurement.
CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STOP <numeric_value>
Defines the stop distance of the distance-to-fault diagram.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace
<numeric_value> Stop distance
Range [def. unit] 4.999 m to +10 m. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 1 mm. [m or
foot (ft), depending on the Distance Unit selected in the System Configuration
dialog]
*RST value +10 m
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer
Note: If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency
(CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt), the start frequency is set to the stop
frequency minus the minimum distance span of 1 mm
(CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SPAN).
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks...
This subsystem defines the circuit models for single ended and balanced port (de-)embedding and
activates the (de-)embedding function.
The circuit models are referenced by means of predefined character data parameters.
Circuit models for embedding/deembedding:
Parameter Circuit model Capacitances Resistances Inductances
FIMPort File import, no circuit model
CSL Serial C, shunt L C1 R1, R2 L1
LSC Serial L, shunt C C1 R1, R2 L1
CSC Serial C, shunt C C1, C2 R1, R2
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
419
LSL Serial L, shunt L R1, R2 L1, L2
SLC Shunt L, serial C C1 R1, R2 L1
SCL Shunt C, serial L C1 R1, R2 L1
SCC Shunt C, serial C C1, C2 R1, R2
SLL Shunt L, serial L R1, R2 L1, L2
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt>:PARame
ters:C<no> CSL | LSC | CSC | SLC | SCL | SCC,<numeric_value>
Specifies the capacitance values C1, C2 in the different circuit models for deembedding.
<Ch> Channel number
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<no> Number of capacitance in circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set
to 1.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 2 [] The number of capacitances depends on the selected circuit model.
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value (see command type description below)
<numeric_value> Capacitance C<no> for the specified circuit model.
Range [def. unit] 1mF to 1 mF [F]. The increment is 1 fF (10
15
F).
*RST value 1 pF (10
12
F)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. In the query form, the <numeric_value>
parameter must be omitted. The command returns the capacitance value for
the specified circuit model.
Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2? CSC
Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C, shunt C circuit model. The
response is 1E-012 (1 pF).
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2 CSC, 2.2E-12
Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt>:PARame
ters:L<no> CSL | LSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SLL,<numeric_value>
Specifies the inductance values L1, L2, L3 in the different circuit models for deembedding.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<no> Number of inductance in circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set
to 1.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
420
Range [def. unit] 1 to 3 [] The number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model.
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value (see command type description below)
<numeric_value> Inductance L<no> for the specified circuit model.
Range [def. unit] 1H to 1 H [H]. The increment is 1 pH (10
12
H).
*RST value 1 nH (10
9
H)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. In the query form, the <numeric_value>
parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the
specified circuit model.
Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:L1? SLL
Query the default inductance L1 for the Shunt L, serial L circuit model. The
response is 1E-009 (1 nH).
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:L1 SLL, 2.2E-9
Increase the inductance to 2.2 nH.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt>:PARame
ters:R<no> CSL | LSC | CSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SCC | SLL,<numeric_value>
Specifies the resistance values R1, R2, R3 in the different circuit models for deembedding.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<no> Number of resistance in circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to
1.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 3 [] The number of resistances depends on the selected circuit model.
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value (see command type description below)
<numeric_value> Resistance R<no> for the specified circuit model.
Range [def. unit] 10 MV to 10 MV [V]. The increment is 1 mV (10
3
V).
*RST value 0 V for all resistances connected in series with an inductance
10 MV for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. In the query form, the <numeric_value>
parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the
specified circuit model.
Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:R1? CSL; R2? CSL
Query the default resistances for the Serial C, shunt L circuit model. The
response is 10000000; 0.
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:R2 CSL, 2.2E+3
Increase the resistance R2 to 2.2 kV.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt>[:STATe]
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
421
<Boolean>
Enables or disables the deembedding function. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its
parameters while deembedding is enabled.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<Boolean> ON Deembedding active
OFF Deembedding inactive
*RST value OFF []
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:TND CSL
Select the Serial C, shunt L circuit model for deembedding.
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:R2 CSL, 2.2E+3; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM ON
Increase the resistance R2 for the Serial C, shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kV and
enable deembedding.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt>:TNDefini
tion FIMPort | CSL | LSC | CSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SCC | SLL
Selects the circuit model for deembedding.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value CSL
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding[:STATe]
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt>:PARameter
s:C<no> CSL | LSC | CSC | SLC | SCL | SCC,<numeric_value>
Specifies the capacitance values C1, C2 in the different circuit models.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<no> Number of capacitance in circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set
to 1.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 2 [] The number of capacitances depends on the selected circuit model.
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value (see command type description below)
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
422
<numeric_value> Capacitance C<no> for the specified circuit model.
Range [def. unit] 1mF to 1 mF [F]. The increment is 1 fF (10
15
F).
*RST value 1 pF (10
12
F)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. In the query form, the <numeric_value>
parameter must be omitted. The command returns the capacitance value for
the specified circuit model.
Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:C2? CSC
Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C, shunt C circuit model. The
response is 1E-012 (1 pF).
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:C2 CSC, 2.2E-12
Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt>:PARameter
s:L<no> CSL | LSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SLL,<numeric_value>
Specifies the inductance values L1, L2, L3 in the different circuit models.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<no> Number of inductance in circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set
to 1.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 3 [] The number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model.
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value (see command type description below)
<numeric_value> Inductance L<no> for the specified circuit model.
Range [def. unit] 1H to 1 H [H]. The increment is 1 pH (10
12
H).
*RST value 1 nH (10
9
H)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. In the query form, the <numeric_value>
parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the
specified circuit model.
Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:L1? SLL
Query the default inductance L1 for the Shunt L, serial L circuit model. The
response is 1E-009 (1 nH).
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:L1 SLL, 2.2E-9
Increase the inductance to 2.2 nH.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt>:PARameter
s:R<no> CSL | LSC | CSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SCC | SLL,<numeric_value>
Specifies the resistance values R1, R2, R3 in the different circuit models.
<Ch> Channel number.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
423
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<no> Number of resistance in circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to
1.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 3 [] The number of resistances depends on the selected circuit model.
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value (see command type description below)
<numeric_value> Resistance R<no> for the specified circuit model.
Range [def. unit] 10 MV to 10 MV [V]. The increment is 1 mV (10
3
V).
*RST value 0 V for all resistances connected in series with an inductance
10 MV for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. In the query form, the <numeric_value>
parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the
specified circuit model.
Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:R1? CSL; R2? CSL
Query the default resistances for the Serial C, shunt L circuit model. The
response is 10000000; 0.
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:R2 CSL, 2.2E+3
Increase the resistance R2 to 2.2 kV.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt>[:STATe]
<Boolean>
Enables or disables the embedding function. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters
while embedding is enabled.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
<Boolean> ON Embedding active
OFF Embedding inactive
*RST value OFF []
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:TND CSL
Select the Serial C, shunt L circuit model for embedding.
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:R2 CSL, 2.2E+3; CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB ON
Increase the resistance R2 for the Serial C, shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kV
and enable embedding.
CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt>:TNDefinitio
n FIMPort | CSL | LSC | CSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SCC | SLL
Selects the circuit model for sembedding.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
424
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
*RST value CSL
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding[:STATe]
CONFigure...
This subsystem creates and deletes channels and assigns names to channels. The commands are
device-specific.
CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog?
Returns the numbers and names of all channels in the current setup.
<Ch> Channel number. This parameter is ignored because the command returns all
channels.
Response String with comma-separated list of channel numbers and names, see example
below. If all channels have been deleted the response is an empty string ("").
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only.
Example: *RST; CONF:CHAN2:STAT ON; NAME 'New Channel'
Create channel 2 and assign the channel name "New Channel".
CONF:CHAN:CAT?
Query all channels and their names. As a default channel no. 1 is created on
*RST, the response is '1,Ch1,2,New_Channel'.
CONF:CHAN:NAME:ID? 'New Channel'
Query the channel number for the channel named "New Channel". The response
is 2.
CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME '<Ch_name>'
Assigns a name to channel number <Ch>. The channel must be created before
(CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON). Moreover it is not possible to assign the same name to two
different channels. CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog? returns a list of all defined channels with their
names.
<Ch> Number of an existing channel.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
425
'<Ch_name>' Channel name, e.g. 'Channel 4'.
*RST value 'Ch1'
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog?
CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME:ID? '<Ch_name>'
Queries the channel number (numeric suffix) of a channel with kown channel name. A channel name must
be assigned before (CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>NAME '<Ch_name>').
CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog? returns a list of all defined channels with their names.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is not relevant and may be omitted (the command
returns the right channel number).
'<Ch_name>' Channel name, e.g. 'Channel 4'.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog?
CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] <Boolean>
Creates or deletes channel no. <Ch> and selects it as the active channel.
CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME defines the channel name.
A channel created with CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON can be configured but has no
trace assigned so that no measurement can be initiated. Use
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_name>,"<Parameter>" to create a new
channel and a new trace.
In remote control it is possible to remove all channels. This is in contrast to manual control where
at least one channel with one diagram area and one trace must be available.
<Ch> Number of the channel to be created or deleted.
<Boolean> ON - Create channel no. <Ch>. If the channel no. <Ch> exists already, it is not
modified but selected as the active channel
OFF - Delete channel no. <Ch>.
*RST value ON for channel no. 1 (created on *RST), OFF for all other channels.
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog?
<Ch> Number of the channel to be created or deleted.
<Boolean> ON - Create channel no. <Ch>. If the channel no. <Ch> exists already, it is not
modified but selected as the active channel
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
426
OFF - Delete channel no. <Ch>.
*RST value ON for channel no. 1 (created on *RST), OFF for all other channels.
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog?
CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CATalog?
Returns the numbers and names of all traces in the current setup.
<Trc> Trace number. This suffix is ignored; the command returns a list of all traces.
Response String with comma-separated list of trace numbers and names, see example
below. If all traces have been deleted the response is an empty string ("").
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only.
Example: *RST; CALC2:PAR:SDEF 'Ch2Trc2', 'S11'
Create channel 2 and a new trace named Ch2Trc2.
CONF:TRAC:CAT?
Query all traces and their names. As a default trace no. 1 is created upon *RST,
the response is '1,TRC1,2,Ch2Trc2'.
CONF:TRAC:NAME:ID? 'Ch2Trc2'
Query the trace number for the trace named "Ch2Trc2". The response is 2.
CONF:TRAC2:NAME?
Query the trace name for trace no. 2. The response is 'Ch2Trc2'.
CONF:TRAC:CHAN:NAME? 'Ch2Trc2'
Query the channel name for trace Ch2Trc2. The response is 'Ch2'.
CONF:TRAC:CHAN:ID? 'Ch2Trc2'
Query the channel number for trace Ch2Trc2. The response is 2.
DIAGnostic:SERVice...
This subsystem provides access to service and diagnostic routines used in service, maintenance and
repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard all commands are device-specific.
Service functions are password-protected (SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]) and should be used by a
R&S service representative only. Refer to the service manual for more information.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
427
DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction '<string>',...
Activates a service function (for internal use only).
DISPlay...
This subsystem controls the selection and presentation of graphical and trace information on the screen.
Note: Traces are generally identified by a string parameter defining the trace name (e.g.
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SELect <Trace_Name>). In the DISPlay... subsystem, traces
are assigned to diagram areas (DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED
<Trace_Name>). While this assignment is valid, the trace is identified by the numeric suffix
<WndTr> and the trace name is not needed.
DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:MARKer[:STATe] <Boolean>
Displays all markers with the same color or display each marker with the color of the associated trace. The
colors of all display elements are defined via DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB <red>, <green>,
<blue>,....
<Element> Numeric suffix, not used in this command. Implemented for compatibility with
DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB.
<Boolean> ON All markers have the same color, to be defined via DISPlay:CMAP6:RGB
<red>, <green>, <blue>. The marker color is independent of the trace
colors.
OFF - Each marker has the color of the associated trace.
*RST value *RST does not affect the color settings; see also description of the Preset
command.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB.
DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB <red>, <green>, <blue> [,<trace_style>,
<trace_width>]
Defines the color of all display elements based on the Red/Green/Blue color model.
<Element> Number of the display element. The display elements corresponding to the
numbers 1 to 28 are listed below.
<red>
<green>
<blue>
Red, green, and blue content of the defined color.
Range [def. unit] 0 (zero intensity, corresponding to a 0 in the 24-bit color model) to 1 (full
intensity, corresponding to 255 in the 24-bit color model) []
<trace_style> Optional trace style, only for traces (<Element> > 12): One of the string
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
428
parameters SOLid | DASHed | DOTTed | DDOTted | DDDotted.
<trace_width> Optional trace width, only for traces (<Element> > 12).
Range [def. unit] 1 to 20 []
*RST values *RST does not affect the color settings; see also description of the Preset
command.
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed (with device-specific numeric suffix and parameters), command or
query. The query returns three values between 0 and one, separated by
commas, corresponding to the red, green, and blue color content.
Example:
*RST; DISP:CMAP:MARK ON; CALC:MARK ON
Create diagram area no. 1 (with default trace showing the S-parameter S
21
) and
a marker Mkr 1.
CALC:PAR:SDEF 'TRC2', 'S11'; DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'TRC2'
Create a new trace named TRC2 and display the trace in diagram area no. 1.
Note that the new trace automatically becomes the active trace.
CALC:MARK2 ON
Assign a marker Mkr 2 to the trace. Both markers are displayed with the same
color.
DISP:CMAP13:RGB 1,0,0; DISP:CMAP14:RGB 0,1,0
Color the first trace red, the second trace green.
DISP:CMAP6:RGB?
Query the marker color. The marker color depends on the settings made in
previous sessions; it is not reset. A possible response is 0,0,0 for black markers.
DISP:CMAP:MARK OFF
Change the marker colors: Mkr 1 turns red, Mkr 2 turns green.
The numeric suffixes <Element> denote the following display elements:
<Element> Display Element
1 Background
2 Text
3 Selected Text
4 Grid
5 Reference Line
6 Same Color for all Markers
7 Horizontal Line / Vertical Range Lines
8 Diagram Title
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
429
9 Limit Fail Trace Color
10 Limit Line Type Off
11 Limit Line Type Upper
12 Limit Line Type Lower
13 Trace 1
14 Trace 2
15 Trace 3
16 Trace 4
17 Trace 5
18 Trace 6
19 Trace 7
20 Trace 8
21 Trace 9
22 Trace 10
23 Trace 11
24 Trace 12
25 Trace 13
26 Trace 14
27 Trace 15
28 Trace 16
DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:TRACe:COLor[:STATe] <Boolean>
Defines the trace color schemes in different diagram areas.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
430
<Element> Numeric suffix, not used in this command. Implemented for compatibility with
DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB.
<Boolean> OFF Independent color scheme in new diagram area. Moved traces change
their color.
ON Color scheme in new diagram area continues the previous color scheme.
Moved traces keep their color.
*RST value *RST does not affect the color settings; see also description of the Preset
command.
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; DISP:CMAP13:RGB 1,0,0
Create diagram area no. 1 (with default trace showing the S-parameter S
21
) and
color the trace red.
DISP:CMAP:TRAC:COL OFF; DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Select independent color schemes for new diagram areas. Create a new
diagram area no. 2.
CALC:PAR:SDEF 'TRC2', 'S11'; DISP:WIND2:TRAC2:FEED 'TRC2'
Create a new trace named TRC2 and display the trace in a new diagram area
no. 2. The new trace is red like the first trace.
DISP:CMAP:TRAC:COL ON; DISP:WIND3:STAT ON
Continue the same color scheme in new diagram areas. Create a new diagram
area no. 3.
CALC:PAR:SDEF 'TRC3', 'S22'; DISP:WIND3:TRAC3:FEED 'TRC3'
Create a new trace named TRC3 and display the trace in a new diagram area
no. 3. The new trace is not red.
DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute '<menu_key>'
Executes the function of a key with a specified name and switches to the local screen.
You can use this command to execute part of your measurement task manually; see Combining
Manual and Remote Control. Menu keys that initiate events are executed immediately, because no
additional input is necessary. However, DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute can be used as well for manual
entries in numeric entry bars, dialogs or wizards.
'<menu_key>' Name of the key as shown in the analyzer's softkey bar (case-sensitive string
variable, may contain blanks but no dots). If the name is not unique, the complete
menu path can be specified, e.g. 'Trace:Format:Phase'. Menus, submenus and
menu function must be separated by colons.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
*RST; DISP:MENU:KEY:EXEC 'S11'; EXEC 'Trace:Format:Phase'
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
431
Assign the S-parameter S
11
to the default trace, open the local analyzer screen,
then display the phase of the measured quantity. The commands are executed
immediately without any manual entry.
DISP:MENU:KEY:EXEC 'Start'
Open the numeric input bar for the start frequency of the sweep. The frequency
can be entered manually.
DISP:MENU:KEY:EXEC 'About Nwa'
Display information about your network analyzer and the firmware version. The
info box is closed when you click the analyzer screen or if you send another
command.
DISPlay:MENU:KEY:SELect '<menu_key>'
Activates the menu or submenu of the specified key.
'<menu_key>' Name of the key as shown in the analyzer's softkey bar (case-sensitive
string variable).
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
*RST; DISP:MENU:KEY:SEL 'S11'
Open the Trace Meas menu in order to select a measured quantity.
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff <holdoff time>
Sets the holdoff time for the powersave mode of the display.
<holdoff time> Holdoff time for the powersave mode.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 60 minutes, the resolution is 1 minute. The entry is dimensionless.
*RST value 15
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; DISP:PSAV:HOLD 30
Sets the holdoff time to 30 minutes.
DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <Boolean>
This command switches on or off the powersave mode of the display. With the powersave mode activated
the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the response time (see
DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff command).
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
432
This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument is exclusively
operated via remote control.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Switching the power-save mode on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; DISP:PSAVe ON
Switches on the powersave mode.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Maximizes all diagram areas in the active setup or restores the previous display configuration.
<Wnd> Number of the diagram area to become the active diagram area.
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:MAXimize acts on all diagrams of the current setup,
however, the diagram no. <Wnd> is displayed on top of the others.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Maximize all diagram areas or restore the previous display
configuration.
*RST value OFF
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query (returns whether or not the diagrams are
maximized).
Example:
*RST; DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram areas no. 1 (with default trace) and 2 (with no trace).
DISP:WIND2:MAXimize ON
Maximize the diagram areas, placing area no. 2 on top.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:STATe <Boolean>
Creates or deletes a diagram area, identified by its area number <Wnd>.
<Wnd> Number of the diagram area to be created or deleted.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Creates or deletes diagram area no. <Wnd>.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query (returns whether or not a particular
diagram area exists).
Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
433
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace
number 9 to it.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe:DATA '<string>'
Defines a title for diagram area <Wnd>.
<Wnd> Number of the diagram area.
'<string>' String variable for the title. The length of the title is practically unlimited but
should be kept short enough to be displayed in the diagrams.
*RST value ''
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND:TITL:DATA 'S21 Test Diagram'
Define a title for the default diagram area. The title is displayed below the top of
the diagram area.
DISP:WIND:TITL OFF; TITL:DATA?
Hide the title. The title is no longer displayed but still defined so it can be
displayed again.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe[:STATe] <Boolean>
Displays or hides the title for area number <Wnd>, defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TITLe:DATA.
<Wnd> Number of the diagram area.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Displays or hides the title.
*RST value ON
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TITLe:DATA.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:DELete
Releases the assignment between a trace and a diagram area, as defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED <Trace_Name> and expressed by the <WndTr>
suffix. The trace itself is not deleted; this must be done via CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete
<Trace_Name>.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
434
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON).
<WndTr> Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same diagram area <Wnd>.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9
to it.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:DELete
Release the assignment between trace no. 9 and window no. 2. The trace can
still be referenced with its trace name Ch4Tr1.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:EFEed '<trace_name>'
Assigns an existing trace (CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <Trace_Name>) to a diagram area
<Wnd>, and displays the trace. Use DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED to assign the
trace to a diagram area using a numeric suffix (e.g. in order to use the
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:OFFSet command).
You can open the trace manager (DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute 'Trace Manager') to obtain an
overview of all channels and traces, including the traces that are not displayed.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON).
<WndTr> Trace number. This suffix is ignored; the trace is referenced by its name.
'<trace_name>' String parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC:EFE 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2. No trace number is
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
435
assigned.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED '<trace_name>'
Assigns an existing trace (CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <Trace_Name>) to a diagram area,
using the <WndTr> suffix, and displays the trace. Use DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe:EFEed to
assign the trace to a diagram area without using a numeric suffix.
A trace can be assigned to a diagram only once. If a attempt is made to assign the same trace a
second time (e.g. by typing DISP:WIND2:TRAC8:FEED 'CH4TR1' after executing the program
example below) an error message 114,"Header suffix out of range is generated.
You can open the trace manager (DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute 'Trace Manager') to obtain
an overview of all channels and traces, including the traces that are not displayed.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON).
<WndTr> Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same diagram area
<Wnd>.
'<trace_name>' String parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace
number 9 to it.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW DALL | MALL | '<trace_name>',
<Boolean>
Displays or hides an existing trace, identified by its trace name (CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine
<Trace_Name>), or a group of traces.
You can open the trace manager (DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute 'Trace Manager') to obtain an
overview of all channels and traces, including the traces that are not displayed.
<Wnd> Number of a diagram area. This suffix is ignored; the command affects traces
in all diagram areas.
<WndTr> Trace number. This suffix is ignored; the trace is referenced by its name.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
436
DALL
MALL
'<trace_name>'
All data traces
All memory traces
Single trace identified by its trace name (string parameter), e.g. 'Trc4'.
*RST value
<Boolean> ON | OFF display or hide trace(s)
*RST value 1 (for the default trace 'Trc1')
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. The query must be sent with the first
parameter; see example below.
Example: *RST; :DISP:TRAC:SHOW? 'Trc1'
Reset the analyzer, creating the default trace 'Trc1'. The trace is displayed;
the query returns 1.
CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S
11
.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON; :DISP:WIND2:TRAC:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Create diagram area no. 2 and display the generated trace in the diagram
area.
DISP:TRAC:SHOW DALL, OFF
Hide both traces in both diagrams.
DISP:TRAC:SHOW? DALL
Query whether all data traces are displayed. The response 0 means that at
least one trace is hidden.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:X:OFFSet <offset>
Shifts the trace <WndTr> in horizontal direction, leaving the positions of all markers unchanged.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON).
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED.
<offset> Stimulus offset value.
Range [def.
unit]
1000 GHz to +1000 GHz [Hz, for frequency sweeps]. The range and unit depends
on the sweep type ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE).
*RST value 0.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, with query.
Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:X:OFFS 1MHZ; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:OFFS 10
Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz, vertically by 10 dB.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
437
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:OFFSet <Magnitude>[,<Phase>,
<Real>, <Imaginary>]
Modifies all points of the trace <WndTr> by means of an added and/or a multiplied complex constant. The
response values M of the trace are transformed according to:
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON).
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED.
<Magnitude> Multiplied magnitude factor
Range [def. unit] 300 dB to + 300 dB [dB]
*RST value 0 dB
<Phase> Multiplied phase factor, optional for setting command but returned by query
Range [def. unit] 3.4*10
38
deg to +3.4*10
38
deg [deg]
*RST value 0 deg
<Real>,
<Imaginary>
Real and imaginary part of added complex constant, optional for setting
command but returned by query
Range [def. unit] 3.4*10
38
to +3.4*10
38
[]
*RST value 0.
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, with query.
Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:X:OFFS 1MHZ; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:OFFS 10
Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz, vertically by 10 dB.
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:OFFS?
Query all response offset values. The response is 10,0,0,0.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO ONCE[,
'<trace_name>']
Displays the entire trace in the diagram area, leaving an appropriate display margin. The trace can be
referenced either by its number <WndTr> or by its name <trace_name>.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON). This suffix is ignored if the optional
<trace_name> parameter is used.
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the
optional <trace_name> parameter is used.
ONCE Activate the autoscale function.
'<trace_name>' Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional
parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be
unique across different channels and windows).
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
438
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example:
*RST; DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV?; RLEV?
Query the value between two grid graticules and the reference value for the
default trace. The response is 10;0.
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE; PDIV?; RLEV?
or: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:AUTO ONCE, 'Trc1'; PDIV?; RLEV?
Autoscale the default trace and query the scaling parameters again. In general
both values have changed.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom <lower_value>[,
'<trace_name>']
Sets the lower (minimum) edge of the diagram area <Wnd>.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON). This suffix is ignored if the optional
<trace_name> parameter is used.
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the
optional <trace_name> parameter is used.
<lower_value> Value and unit for the lower diagram edge.
Range [def. unit] Range and unit depend on the measured quantity, see Units for DISPlay...
Commands.
*RST value Depending on the measured quantity. The default lower edge for a dB Mag
diagram is 80 dB.
'<trace_name>' Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. both numeric suffixes
are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and
windows).
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, with query.
Example:
CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9
to it.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:Y:BOTT -40; TOP 10
or: DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:BOTT -40, 'CH4TR1'; TOP 10, 'CH4TR1'
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
439
Scale the diagram between -40 dB and +10 dB.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <divisions>[,
'<trace_name>']
Sets the value between two grid graticules (value per division) for the diagram area <Wnd>. When a new
PDIVision value is entered, the current RLEVel is kept the same, while the top and bottom scaling is
adjusted for the new PDIVision value.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON). This suffix is ignored if the optional
<trace_name> parameter is used.
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the
optional <trace_name> parameter is used.
<divisions> Value and unit for the vertical diagram divisions.
Range [def. unit] Range and unit depend on the measured quantity, see Units for DISPlay...
Commands.
*RST value Depending on the measured quantity. The default reference level for an S-
parameter displayed in a dB Mag diagram is 10 dB.
'<trace_name>' Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional
parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be
unique across different channels and windows).
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, with query.
Example:
CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9
to it.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:Y:PDIV 5
or: DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:PDIV 5, 'CH4TR1'
Set the value per division to 5 dB.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <level>[,
'<trace_name>']
Sets the reference level (or reference value) for a particular displayed trace. Setting a new reference level
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
440
does not affect the value of PDIVision. The trace can be referenced either by its number <WndTr> or by
its name <trace_name>.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON). This suffix is ignored if the optional
<trace_name> parameter is used.
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the
optional <trace_name> parameter is used.
<level> Value and unit for the reference level (or reference value, if the trace does not
show a level).
Range [def. unit] Range and unit depend on the measured quantity, see Units for DISPlay...
Commands.
*RST value Depending on the measured quantity. The default reference level for an S-
parameter displayed in a dB Mag diagram is 0 dB.
'<trace_name>' Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional
parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be
unique across different channels and windows).
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, with query.
Example:
CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9
to it.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:Y:RLEV -10
or: DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:RLEV -10, 'CH4TR1'
Change the reference level to 10 dB.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <reference>[,
'<trace_name>']
Sets the point on the y-axis to be used as the reference position as a percentage of the length of the y-
axis. The reference position is the point on the y-axis which should equal the RLEVel.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON). This suffix is ignored if the optional
<trace_name> parameter is used.
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the
optional <trace_name> parameter is used.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
441
<reference> Value of the reference position in percent. The top of the y-axis is defined to
have a reference position of 100%, while the bottom of the y-axis is defined to
have a reference position of 0%.
Range [def. unit] 0 to 100 [PCT].
*RST value 80 PCT.
'<trace_name>' Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional
parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be
unique across different channels and windows).
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, with query.
Example:
CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11.
DISP:WIND2:STAT ON
Create diagram area no. 2.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1'
Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9
to it.
DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:Y:RPOS 50
or: DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50, 'CH4TR1'
Set the reference position to the center of the diagram area.
DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:TOP <upper_value>[,
'<trace_name>']
Sets the upper (maximum) edge of the diagram area <Wnd>.
<Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON). This suffix is ignored if the optional
<trace_name> parameter is used.
<WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of
DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the
optional <trace_name> parameter is used.
<upper_value> Value and unit for the upper diagram edge.
Range [def. unit] Range and unit depend on the measured quantity, see Units for DISPlay...
Commands.
*RST value Depending on the measured quantity. The default upper edge for a dB Mag
diagram is +20 dB.
'<trace_name>' Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional
parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be
unique across different channels and windows).
*RST value
SCPI, Command Confirmed, with query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
442
Types
Example: See DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom
Units for DISPlay... Commands
The DISPlay... subsystem contains commands to define particular points in the diagram, e.g. to set the
scale or a reference value. This requires the entry of a numeric value and a physical unit, depending on
the parameter type displayed. The following table lists the physical units accepted by the analyzer.
Power DBM, DB, DBW, W, MW, UW, NW, PW
Voltage
V, MV, UV, NV, PV, DBV, DBMV, DBUV
Phase
DEG, KDEG, MDEG, UDEG, NDEG, PDEG
Group delay
S, MS, US, NS, PS
Impedance
OHM, GOHM, MOHM, KOHM
Admittance
SIE, MSIE, USIE, NSIE
Inductance
H, MH, UH, NH, PH, FH
Capacitance
F, MF, UF, NF, PF, FF
Dimensionless
UNIT, MUNIT, UUNIT, NUNIT, PUNIT, FUNIT
FORMat...
This subsystem sets a data format for transferring numeric and array information from and to the analyzer.
FORMat:BORDer NORMal | SWAPped
Controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped byte order.
Parameters SWAPped The least significant bit is transferred first (little endian)
NORMal The most significant bit is transferred first (big endian)
*RST value SWAPpped (if the GPIB Language is set to PNA or HP xxxx, then the order
is NORMal)
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
FORM:BORD NORM
Change the bit order to normal mode.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
443
FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | REAL [,<length>]
Selects the format for numeric data transferred to and from the analyzer.
The format setting is only valid for commands and queries whose description states that the response
is formatted as described by FORMat[:DATA]. In particular, it affects trace data transferred by
means of the commands in the TRACe:... system.
ASCII Numeric data is transferred as ASCII bytes. The numbers are separated by commas
as specified in IEEE 488.2.
REAL Data is transferred in a definite length block as IEEE floating point numbers of the
specified <length>. See block data format.
If binary data is transferred to the analyzer, the receive terminator should be set
to EOI (SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator EOI) to
avoid inadvertent interruption of the data transfer.
<length> The optional <length> parameter is needed for REAL format only. It defines the length
of the floating point numbers in bits. Valid values are 32 and 64.
*RST value ASCII. The default length of REAL data is 32 bits (single precision).
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
FORM REAL, 32
Select real data format.
SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI
Set the terminator to EOI.
(During a calibration) ... CORR:CDAT? 'REFLTRACK',1,0
Query a system error correction term. The data is transferred in a definite length block
which can be written to a file; the analyzer displays the message <no_of_bytes> bytes
binary data received.
FORMat:DEXPort:SOURce FDATa | SDATa | MDATa
Defines the format for traces retrieved with the ZVR-compatible command
TRACe[:DATA][:RESPonse][:ALL]?
This command is not relevant for results read with the CALCulate:DATA... commands.
Parameters See list of parameters below.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the measured parameter and format. The unit is the default unit of
the measured parameter; see CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine.
*RST value SDATa
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
444
Example:
See TRACe[:DATA][:RESPonse][:ALL]?
The following parameters are related to trace data (see also Data Flow diagram):
FDATa Formatted trace data, according to the selected trace format (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat). 1 value per trace point for
Cartesian diagrams, 2 values for polar diagrams.
SDATa Unformatted trace data: Real and imaginary part of each measurement point. 2 values per trace point irrespective of the
selected trace format. The trace mathematics is not taken into account.
MDATa Unformatted trace data (see SDATa) after evaluation of the trace mathematics.
HCOPy...
The HCOPy system controls the output of screen information to an external device. The instrument allows
two independent printer configurations which can be set separately with the numeric suffix <1|2>. Part of
the functionality of this system is included in the File menu.
HCOPy[:IMMediate<config>] <numeric_value>
Starts a hardcopy output.
<config> 1 | 2 - Printer configuration to be used for the hardcopy output. If there is no
suffix, configuration 1 is automatically selected.
<numeric_value> 1 | 2 - Starts the hardcopy output to device 1 (default) or 2.
*RST value -
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query
Example:
See HCOPy[:IMMediate<config>]:NEXT
HCOPy[:IMMediate<config>]:NEXT <numeric_value>
Starts a hardcopy output. If the output is printed to a file (see HCOPy:DESTination<1|2>), the file name
used in the last saving process is automatically counted up to the next unused name.
<config> 1 | 2 - Printer configuration to be used for the hardcopy output. If there is no
suffix, configuration 1 is automatically selected.
<numeric_value> 1 | 2 - Starts the hardcopy output to device 1 (default) or 2.
*RST value -
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query
Example:
HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
Select the data format
HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'
Direct the hardcopy to a file.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
445
MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\Print.bmp'; HCOP
Select a file name and start printing to the file Print.bmp.
HCOP:NEXT
Save the hardcopy output into the file Print_001.bmp.
HCOP:NEXT
Save the hardcopy output into the file Print_002.bmp.
HCOPy:ABORt
Aborts a running hardcopy output.
Parameters None.
*RST value -
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query
Example: HCOP:ABOR
Abort printing.
HCOPy:CMAP<Element>:DEFault<numeric_value>
Resets the colors for a hardcopy to the selected default settings.
<Element> Numeric suffix, not used in this command.
<numeric_value> DEFault1 SCREEN COLORS, but background white
DEFault2 OPTIMIZED COLOR SET
DEFault3 USER DEFINED color set
*RST value -
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query
Example: HCOP:CMAP:DEF2
Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a hardcopy.
HCOPy:CMAP<Element>:HSL <hue>,<sat>,<lum>
Defines the color table in user defined colors. To each numeric suffix of CMAP is assigned one or several
picture elements which can be modified by varying the corresponding color setting.
<Element> Number of the display element. The display elements corresponding to the
numbers 1 to 27 are listed below.
<hue> tint
<sat> saturation
<lum> brightness
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
446
Range [def. unit] 0 to 1 for all parameters.
*RST value -
Note: The values set are not changed by *RST.
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query
Example: HCOP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0
Changes the grid color.
The numeric suffixes <Element> denote the following display elements:
<Element> Display Element
1 Background
2 Grid
3 Function field + status field + data entry text
4 Function field LED on
5 Function field LED warn
6 Enhancement label text
7 Status field background
8 Trace 1
9 Trace 2
10 Trace 3
11 Marker
12 Lines
13 Measurement status + limit check pass
14 Limit check fail
15 Reserved
16 Reserved
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
447
17 Table selected field text
18 Table selected field background
19 Reserved
20 Reserved
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Reserved
25 Reserved
26 Logo
27 Trace 4
HCOPy:CMAP<Element>:PDEFined BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN |
RED | MAGenta | YELLow | WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen | LCYan |
LRED | LMAGenta
Defines the color table in user defined colors using predefined color values. To each numeric suffix of
CMAP is assigned one or several picture elements which can be modified by varying the corresponding
color setting.
<Element> Number of the display element. For details on the CMAP assignment refer to
HCOPy:CMAP<Element>:HSL.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 27
BLACk ...
LMAGenta
Predefined colors.
*RST value -
Note: The values set are not changed by *RST.
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query
Example:
HCOP:CMAP2:PDEF GRE
HCOPy:DESTination<config> 'MMEM' | 'SYST:COMM:PRIN' | 'SYST:COMM:CLIP'
Selects the printer output medium (Disk, Printer or Clipboard) associated with configuration 1 or 2.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
448
The type of instrument is selected with SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect, which will
automatically select a default output medium. Therefore the HCOPy:DESTination command should
always be sent after setting the device type.
<config> 1 | 2 - Printer configuration to be used for the hardcopy output. If there is no
suffix, configuration 1 is automatically selected.
'MMEM' Directs the hardcopy to a file. The MMEMory:NAME command defines the file
name. All formats can be selected for HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
'SYST:COMM:PRIN' Directs the hardcopy to the printer. The printer is selected with the
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:SELect command.
GDI should be selected for HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
'SYST:COMM:CLIP' Directs the hardcopy to the clipboard. EWMF should be selected for
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
*RST value
Note: *RST does not overwrite the printer destination.
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example:
SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 'LASER on LPT1'
Selects the printer and output medium for device 2.
HCOP:DEST2 'SYST:COMM:PRIN'
Selects the printer interface as device 2.
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
Selects between color and monochrome hardcopy of the screen.
<Boolean> ON - Selects the color hardcopy mode.
OFF - Selects the monochrome hardcopy mode.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example: HCOP:DEV:COL ON
Select color hardcopy.
HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage GDI | WMF | EWMF | BMP
Selects a file format for printer files. Selecting the format is recommended to ensure that the file defined
via MMEMory:NAME can be read or imported by an external application. See also HCOPy:DESTination
command.
GDI Graphics Device Interface:
Default format for the output to a printer configured under Windows. Must be
selected for the output to the printer interface.
Can be used for the output to a file. The printer driver configured under Windows is
used in this case and a printerspecific file format is thus generated.
WMF, EWMF Windows Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format:
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
449
Data formats for output files which can be integrated in corresponding programs for
documentation purposes at a later time. WMF can only be used for output to a file
and EWMF also for the output to the clipboard.
BMP, JPG,
PNG
Windows Bitmap:
Data format for output to files only.
*RST value -
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example:
HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
Select Windows bitmap format for printer files.
MMEM:NAME 'C:\Screenshots\PLOT1.BMP'
Define a printer file name and specify an existing directory
(without creating the file).
HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'; HCOP
Select 'Print to file' and create the printer file specified before.
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
Selects the complete screen to be output. The hardcopy output is always provided with comments, title,
time and date. As an alternative to the whole screen, e.g. only traces
(HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:STATe command) can be output.
*RST value After a reset, the complete information is printed.
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM:ALL
Select the complete information to be printed.
HCOP
Start printing.
HCOPy:ITEM:LOGO[:STATe] <Boolean>
Qualifies whether or not the printed output contains the logo. The default R&S logo (file Logo.gif) is stored
in the Resources\Images subdirectory of the NWA program directory and can be replaced by another
logo.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Logo is included or excluded.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
HCOP:ITEM:ALL
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
450
Select the complete information to be printed.
HCOP:ITEM:LOGO ON; HCOP
Include the logo in the printed output and start
printing.
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<numeric_suffix>:TEXT <string>
Defines the comment text for the printout.
<numeric_suffix> The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command.
<string> Text with a maximum of 100 characters; line feed by means of character
@.
*RST value -
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT 'comment'
HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow<numeric_suffix>:TRACe:STATe <Boolean>
Selects the output of the currently displayed trace.
Both the HCOPy:ITEM:WINDow:TRACe:STATe command and the HCOPy:ITEM:ALL command enable
the output of the whole screen.
<numeric_suffix> The numeric suffixes <1|2> are irrelevant for this command.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Selects or deselects the output of the currently displayed
trace.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TRACe:STAT ON
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<device> PORTrait | LANDscape
Defines the orientation of the printed page. Switching between LANDscape and PORTrait rotates the
hardcopy result by 90 degrees. No other settings are changed.
The command is only available provided that the output medium "printer" (HCOPy:DESTination) has
been selected.
<device> 1 | 2 - Hardcopy device 1 or 2.
PORTrait Short edge of the paper is the top of the page.
LANDscape Long edge of the paper is the top of the page.
*RST value PORTrait
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
451
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND; HCOP
Select landscape page orientation and start printing.
HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow ACTive | ALL | SINGle
Defines the number of diagram areas per printed page.
ACTive Print only active diagram area.
ALL All diagram areas are printed on one page.
SINGle One diagram area per page.
*RST value ALL
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:WIND SING; HCOP
Select one diagram area per page and start printing.
INITiate<Ch>...
This subsystem controls the initiation of the trigger system and defines the scope of the triggered
measurement.
INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous <Boolean>
Qualifies whether the analyzer measures in single sweep or in continuous sweep mode.
<Ch> Channel number. The channel is ignored because the command affects all
channels.
<Boolean> ON - The analyzer measures continuously, repeating the current sweep.
OFF - The measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps defined via
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt. INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate] initiates a new
measurement cycle.
*RST value ON
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
*RST; INIT:CONT OFF
Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including channel no. 2 created
later).
INIT:SCOP SING
State that a single sweep will be performed in the active channel only.
CALC2:PAR:SDEF 'TRC2','S11'; INIT2
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
452
Create channel no. 2 with a new trace and start a single sweep in channel no. 2.
INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate]
Starts a new single sweep sequence. This command is available in single sweep mode only
(INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). The data of the last sweep (or previous sweeps, see Sweep History)
can be read using CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:NSWeep? SDATa, <history_count>.
In contrast to all other commands of the analyzer, INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate] has been
implemented for overlapped execution; see Command Synchronization.
<Ch> Channel number. If the channel number does not exist the analyzer returns an error
message. If INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate]:SCOPe ALL is active, this suffix is
ignored.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, no query
Example:
See INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous
INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate]:SCOPe ALL | SINGle
Selects the scope of the single sweep sequence. The setting is applied in single sweep mode only
(INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF).
<Ch> Channel number. The channel is ignored because the command affects all
channels.
ALL INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate] starts a single sweep in all channels.
SINGle INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate] starts a single sweep in the referenced channel
<Ch> only.
*RST value ALL
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous
INPut...
This subsystem controls the characteristics of the analyzers input ports.
INPut<port_no>:ATTenuation <numeric_value>
Sets the attenuation for the received waves.
Note: INPut<port_no>:ATTenuation is not channel-specific; the value is valid for all channels. Use
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
453
[SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation to set or query a channel-specific attenuation value.
<port_no> Test port number of the analyzer, 1 or 2. If unspecified the numeric suffix is
set to 1.
<numeric_value> Attenuation factor for the received wave.
Range [def. unit] 0 dB to 30 dB. UP and DOWN increment/decrement the attenuation in 5 dB
steps. The analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum attenuation
to the closest step.
*RST value +10 dB (0 dB for R&S ZVL13)
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query (query cannot return channel-specific settings, would be
misleading).
Example:
INP2:ATT 10
Set the step attenuator for the wave received at port 2 and for all channels to
10 dB. The waves at the other test ports are not affected.
SENS1:POW:ATT? BREC
Query the receiver step attenuator setting at port 2 and for channel no. 1. The
response is 10.
INSTrument...
This subsystem identifies and selects particular resources (SCPI: logical instruments) of the analyzer.
INSTrument:NSELect <code_no>
This command switches between the measurement modes by means of numbers.
<code_no> 2 - Network analyzer mode
1 - Spectrum analyzer mode (option R&S ZVL-K1, also enables the
commands with code numbers 3 and 12)
19 - Noise figure and gain measurements (option FSL-K30)
8 - WCDMA measurements (3GPP/FDD BTS, option FSL-K72)
16 - WLAN OFDM analysis (option FSL-K91)
6 - WiMAX OFDM/OFDMA analysis (option FSL-K93)
3 - AM/FM/^M measurement demodulator (option FSL-K7)
12 - Bluetooth measurements (option FSL-K8)
The codes for the different spectrum analyzer options are also included in the
option descriptions.
*RST value 2
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example:
INST:NSEL 2
Switch the instrument to network analyzer mode.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
454
INSTrument:PORT:COUNt?
Returns the number of test ports of the analyzer.
Response Number of ports (integer number).
Range [def. unit] 2
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, query only.
Example:
INST:PORT:COUN?
Return the number of test ports. The response is 2.
INSTrument[:SELect] NWA | SAN | NOISe | BWCD | WLAN | WiMAX | ADEM | BTO
Switches between the measurement modes by means of text parameters.
Parameters NWA - Network analyzer mode
SAN - Spectrum analyzer mode (option R&S ZVL-K1, also enables the ADEM
and BTO commands)
NOISe - Noise figure and gain measurements (option FSL-K30)
BWCD - WCDMA measurements (3GPP/FDD BTS, option FSL-K72)
WLAN - WLAN OFDM analysis (option FSL-K91)
WiMAX - WiMAX OFDM/OFDMA analysis (option FSL-K93)
ADEM - AM/FM/^M measurement demodulator (option FSL-K7)
BTO - Bluetooth measurements (option FSL-K8)
*RST value
NWA
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example: INST SAN
Switch the instrument to spectrum analyzer mode.
MEMory...
The MEMory system controls the loaded setups of the analyzer.
The MEMory... command don't affect any stored files. Use the MEMory... commands to store and load
data and to manage files stored on a mass storage device.
MEMory:CATalog?
Returns the names of all loaded setups.
Response Comma-separated list of all setups.
*RST value 'Set1' (the default setup is created after each *RST).
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
455
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed (with device-specific response), query only.
Example:
*RST; MEM:DEF 'SETUP_2'
Create a setup named 'Setup_2' and make it the active
setup.
MEM:CAT?
Query all setups. The response is 'Set1,Setup_2'.
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\RecallSets\Setup_2.nwa';
MEM:DEL 'Setup_2.nwa'
Store the active setup Setup_2 to a file, renaming it Setup_2.nwa. Close the
setup.
MEMory:DEFine '<setup_name>'
Creates a new setup <setup_name> using default settings for the traces, channels and diagram areas.
The created setup becomes the active setup.
'<setup_name>' String parameter to specify the name of the created setup.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MEM:CAT?.
MEMory:DELete[:NAME] '<file_name>'
Closes the specified setup.
'<setup_name>' String parameter to specify the name of the setup to be closed.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query.
Example:
See MEM:CAT?.
MEMory:SELect '<setup_name>'
Selects a setup as the active setup.
'<setup_name>' String parameter to specify the setup.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
*RST; MEM:DEF 'SETUP_2'
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
456
Create a setup named 'Setup_2' and make it the active
setup.
MEM:SEL 'Set1'
Activate the default setup Set1.
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\RecallSets\Set1.nwa'; MEM:DEL
'Set1.nwa'
Store the active setup Set1 to a file, renaming it Set1.nwa. Close the setup.
MMEMory...
The MMEMory system provides mass storage capabilities for the analyzer.
Internal and external mass storage
The mass storage of the analyzer may be internal or external. The internal mass storage device can be
any section of the internal hard disk (mapped to drive C:\). The external mass storage device can be a
floppy disk inserted into the drive at the front panel of the instrument, which is mapped to drive a:\ (see
MMEMory:MSIS), a USB memory stick connected to one of the USB ports (mapped to any free drive
letter) or a network connection.
File and directory names
The <file_name> and <directory_name> parameters are strings. Some commands use a fixed directory;
for others the <file_name> can contain the complete path including the drive name and all subdirectories,
e.g. 'C:\TEMP\TRASH\test.txt' for the file named test.txt in the TEMP\TRASH subdirectory of the internal
hard disk drive C:\. If no complete path is specified, the file location is relative to the current directory
(queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?). The file name itself may contain the period as a separator for
extensions.
File and directory names can be chosen according to Windows conventions; the restrictions placed on
file names known from DOS systems do not apply. All letters and numbers are allowed, as well as the
special characters "_", "^", "$", "~", "!", "#", "%", "&", "-", "{", "}", "(", ")", "@" and "`". Reserved file names
are CON, AUX, COM1, ..., COM4, LPT1, ..., LPT3, NUL and PRN.
The use of wildcards ? and * is not allowed.
MMEMory:AKAL:FACTory:CONVersion '<directory_name>'
Converts the calibration data of the standards in the active calibration unit
(SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess) to Touchstone format and copies it to the specified
directory.
'<directory_name>' String parameter to specify the directory.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query (returns the current directory).
Example:
MMEM:AKAL:FACTory:CONVersion 'C:\AKAL\Touchstone'
Convert and copy the calibration data of the standards
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
457
to the specified directory.
MMEMory:CATalog? '<directory_name>'
Returns the contents of a specified directory.
'<directory_name>' String parameter to specify the directory.
Response Comma-separated list of all file names in the directory (string parameters).
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, query only.
Example:
MMEM:CAT? 'C:\R_S\Instr\user'
Response: 'autolog.txt','autologin.reg','no_autologin.reg'
MMEMory:CDIRectory '<directory_name>'
Changes the default directory for mass memory storage.
'<directory_name>' String parameter to specify the directory.
*RST value (A *RST does not change the current directory)
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query (without parameter, returns the current
directory).
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'C:\Documents and
Settings\NetworkService\Application Data'
Change to the specified directory.
MMEMory:CLEar:ALL
Deletes all device settings in the current directory. The current directory can be selected with the
MMEMory:CDIRectory command. The default directory is C:\R_S\instr\user\Nwa.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example: MMEM:CLE:ALL
Delete all device settings files.
MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1,<file_name>
Deletes the instrument setting selected by <file_name>. All associated files on the mass memory storage
are cleared.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
458
<file_name>
File name of the settings file. The file extension can be omitted. If the file is not
stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\user directory, the full path has to be specified.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:CLE:STAT 1,'TEST.ZVL.DFL'
Delete file TEST.zvl.dfl.
MMEMory:COPY '<file_source>','<file_destination>'
Copies an existing file to a new file or directory.
'<file_source>',
'<file_destination>'
String parameters to specify the name of the file to be copied and the
name of the new file or directory.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query.
Example:
MMEM:COPY 'C:\USER\DATA\SETUP.ZVL.DFL','E:'
Copy file Setup.zvl.dfl in directory C:\USER\DATA to
the external storage medium, mapped to drive E:\.
MMEMory:DATA '<file_name>', <data>
Loads <data> into the file <file_name>. The delimiter must be set to EOI
(SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator EOI) to obtain errorfree data transfer.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name of the file.
<data> Data in 488.2 block data format. The delimiter EOI must be selected to achieve
correct data transfer.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, with query. The query form MMEMory:DATA? <file_name> returns
the associated <data> in block format (the delimiter setting is irrelevant for the
query).
Example:
MMEM:DATA? 'C:\TEMP\TEST01.HCP'
Query the block data contained in file TEST01.HCP.
MMEMory:DELete '<file_name>'
Removes a file from the specified directory.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and path of the file to be removed. If the
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
459
path is omitted, the current directory is used (see MMEMory:CDIRectory).
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example:
MMEM:DEL 'C:\TEMP\TEST01.HCP'
Remove TEST01.HCP from the directory C:\TEMP.
MMEMory:DELete:CORRection <file_name>'
Deletes a system error correction data set stored in the cal pool (cal group file).
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name of the cal group file to be deleted. Cal group
files must have the extension *.cal. The directory path must not be specified; the
analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory
C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Data.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection
MMEMory:LOAD:AUTO 1,'FACTORY | <file_name>'
Defines which device settings are automatically loaded after the device is switched on. The contents of the
file are read after switching on the device and used to define the new device state.
The data set defined as auto recall set can also be restored by the *RST command.
FACTORY
Deactivates the startup recall function.
<file_name>
Activates the startup recall function and defines the device settings to be
loaded.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example: MMEM:LOAD:AUTO 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST'
Define the TEST file as startup recall file and activate the function.
MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe '<source_directory>'
Loads all cable description files (*.rsc) from a specified directory. The default source directories for cable
description files (C:\R_S\Instr\resources\Nwa\CableTypes for predefined,
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
460
C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\CableTypes for user-defined cables) are not affected; see example.
'<source_directory>' String parameter to specify the source directory.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:STORe:CABLe
MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT '<file_name>'
Loads cal kit data from a specified NWA cal kit file.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be loaded. If
no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory, to be queried with
MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
Note: The loaded file must be a NWA-specific cal kit file with the extension *.calkit.
ZVR cal kit files can be imported using the
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:INSTall command. Agilent cal kit
files can be imported manually and converted into *.calkit files.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:CKIT
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit'
Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit.calkit from
the default cal kit directory.
... :MMEM:STOR:CKIT 'New_kit',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit'
Store the data for the user-defined cal kit Newkit and
overwrite the cal kit file New_kit.calkit.
MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:SDATa '<conn_name>', '<ckit_name>', MMTHrough |
MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLine | MFLine | FFLine | MMATten | MFATten |
FFATten | MMSNetwork | MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork | MOPen | FOPen | MSHort |
FSHort | MOSHort | FOSHort | MREFlect | FREFlect | MMTCh | FMTCh | MSMatch |
FSMatch, '<stdlabel_name>', '<file_name>' [,<port1_no>][,<port2_no>]
Loads cal kit data for a specific connector type, cal kit, and calibration standard from a specified
Touchstone file, assigning a label for the cal data. A restriction on the port assignment may be defined in
addition.
'<conn_name>' String parameters containing the name of the connector type.
'<ckit_name>' String parameters containing the name of a calibration kit available on the
analyzer.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
461
Parameters Standard type; for a description refer to the table of standard types.
'<stdlabel_name>' String parameter defining a label for the cal kit data. An empty string means
that no label is defined.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the Touchstone file to be
loaded. A *.s1p file must be used for one-port standards, a *.s2p file for two-
port standards. If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current
directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
<port1_no>,
<port2_no>
Port assignment: One port number for one-port standards, two port number for
two-port standards. If the port numbers are omitted, the cal kit data is valid for
all ports.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:CKIT:SDAT 'N 50 Ohm','Default Kit',MOPEN,'Test
data','test.s1p',1
Load the file Test.s1p from the current directory in order
to define the properties of an Open (m) standard in the
cal kit named Default Kit for the N 50 R connector type.
Assign the label Test data and specify that the data
standard data is only valid for port no. 1.
Connector and cal kit naming conventions
Connector and calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters. The strings contain the
connector and cal kit names used in the Calibration Kits dialog; a V in the name must be replaced by
'Ohm', e.g.:
'NewKit1' denotes the user-defined calibration kit NewKit1.
'N 50 Ohm Ideal Kit' denotes the N 50 V Dummy Kit.
'ZV-Z21 typical' denotes the cal kit ZV-Z21 typical.
MMEMory:LOAD:CMAP '<file_name>'
Loads a color scheme from a specified NWA color scheme file.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be loaded.
The default extension (manual control) for color scheme files is *.ColorScheme,
although other extensions are allowed.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:CMAP
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\ColorSchemes\Test.ColorScheme'
Load the previously created color scheme file
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
462
Test.ColorScheme from the default color scheme directory.
DISP:CMAP13:RGB 1,0,0; DISP:CMAP14:RGB 0,1,0
Color the first trace red, the second trace green.
MMEM:STOR:CMAP
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\ColorSchemes\Test.ColorScheme'
Store the data for the user-defined cal kit Newkit and
overwrite the cal kit file New_kit.calkit.
MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection <Ch>,'<file_name>'
Applies a system error correction data set stored in the cal pool (cal group file) to channel no. <Ch>.
<Ch> Channel number of an existing channel
<file_name> String parameter to specify the name of the cal group file to be loaded. Cal group
files must have the extension *.cal. The directory path must not be specified; the
analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory
C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Data.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:CORR 1,'Calgroup1.cal'
Copy the current correction data set of channel 1 to a cal
group file Calgroup1.cal.
CONF:CHAN2:STAT ON; :MMEM:LOAD:CORR 2,'Calgroup1.cal'
Apply the stored correction data to channel 2.
MMEM:LOAD:CORR:RES 2,'Calgroup1.cal'
Undo the previous action: Resolve the link, causing channel 2
to use its previous correction data.
MMEM:DEL:CORR 'Calgroup1.cal'
Delete the created cal group file.
MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:RESolve <Ch>[,'<file_name>']
Resolves the link between channel <Ch> and the correction data set (cal group file) so that the channel
uses its previous correction data.
<Ch> Channel number
'<file_name>' Optional string parameter to specify the name of the cal group file. Cal group files
must have the extension *.cal. The directory path must not be specified.
If there is no link between <Ch> and the specified file, the command has no
effect. If no file is specified, the command resolves any link between <Ch> and
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
463
an arbitrary cal group file.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection
MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit '<trc_name>','<file_name>'[,'<param_name>', <x_offset>,
<y_offset>, <type>]
Loads a limit line definition from a specified file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name. Limit lines
are created using the CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit... commands.
Limit lines can be loaded from Touchstone files (*.s<n>p, where <n> denotes the number of ports).
The optional parameters '<param_name>', <x_offset>, <y_offset>, <type> are only relevant for
Touchstone files. For *.limit files, no optional parameters can be set.
'<trc_name>' Name of an existing trace in the active setup (string parameter). The imported
limit line is assigned to this trace, irrespective of the trace information in the limit
line file.
*RST value
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the limit line file to be
loaded. The default extension (manual control) for limit line files is *.limit,
although other extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer
searches the current directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?. See
also note on Touchstone files above.
*RST value
'<param_name>' String parameter, selects an S-parameter from a Touchstone file. The parameter
must be compatible with the file type (e.g. for one-port Touchstone files *.s1p,
only the parameter name 'S11' is allowed).
*RST value 'S11' (if all optional parameters are omitted)
<x_offset> Stimulus offset for limit lines loaded from a Touchstone file. A 1 GHz offset shifts
the limit line by 1 GHz in (positive) horizontal direction.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the sweep range of the analyzer. [Hz]
*RST value 0
<y_offset> Response offset for limit lines loaded from a Touchstone file. A 1 dB offset shifts
the limit line by 1 dB in (positive) vertical direction.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the measured quantity. [dB]
*RST value 0
<type> Limit line type :
LMAX upper limit line
LMIN lower limit line
OFF limit line off
*RST value LMAX (if all optional parameters are omitted)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
464
Example:
Assume that the current setup contains two traces named
Trc1 and Trc2, respectively, and that limit lines have been
defined for Trc1.
MMEM:STOR:LIM 'TRC1',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\LIMitLines\Lim_Trc1.limit'
Store the limit line definition of Trc1 to a limit line
file.
MMEM:LOAD:LIM 'TRC2',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\LIMitLines\Lim_Trc1.limit'
Load the previously created limit line file and assign the
limit lines to Trc2.
MMEM:STOR:TRAC 'TRC1',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\LIMitLines\Trc1.s1p'
Store the current trace data of Trc1 to a limit line file
in Touchstone format.
MMEM:LOAD:LIM 'TRC1',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\LIMitLines\Trc1.s1p', 'S11', 0, 2,
LMAX
Load the previously created Touchstone limit line file and
assign the limit lines to Trc1, applying a response offset
of 2 dB.
CALC:LIMit:DISPlay ON
Show the limit line in the diagram.
MMEMory:LOAD:NWANalyzer <numeric_value>,'<file_name>'
Loads configuration data from a specified setup file and sets the analyzer to the corresponding instrument
state.
<numeric_value> 1 (the <numeric_value> is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is
ignored).
<file_name> String parameter to specify the name and directory of the setup file to be
loaded. The default extension (manual control) for setup files is *.nwa, although
other extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer searches the
current directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:NWAN 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Setup_0413.nwa'
Store the current setup configuration in the file
Setup_0413.NWA in the default directory for setup files.
MMEM:LOAD:NWAN 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Setup_0413.nwa'
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
465
Load the settings stored in Setup_0413.NWA.
MMEMory:LOAD:RIPPle '<trc_name>','<file_name>'
Loads a ripple limit definition from a specified file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name. Ripple
limits are created using the CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle... commands.
'<trc_name>' Name of an existing trace in the active setup (string parameter). The imported ripple
limit line is assigned to this trace, irrespective of the trace information in the ripple
limit file.
*RST value
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the ripple limit file to be
loaded. The default extension (manual control) for ripple limit files is *.ripple,
although other extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer searches
the current directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
Assume that the current setup contains two traces named Trc1
and Trc2, respectively, and that ripple limits have been
defined for Trc1.
MMEM:STOR:RIPP 'TRC1',
'C:\Rohde&Schwarz\NWA\LIMitLines\Lim_Trc1.limit'
Store the ripple limit definition of Trc1 to a ripple limit
file.
MMEM:LOAD:RIPP 'TRC2',
'C:\Rohde&Schwarz\NWA\LIMitLines\Lim_Trc1.limit'
Load the previously created ripple limit file and assign the
limits to Trc2.
CALC:RIPP:DISPlay ON
Show the ripple limit line for the active trace in the diagram.
MMEMory:LOAD:SEGMent <Ch>,'<file_name>'
Loads a sweep segment definition from a specified file and assigns it to a specified channel. Sweep
segments are defined using the [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... commands.
<Ch> Channel number.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the sweep segment file to be
loaded. The default extension (manual control) for sweep segment files is *.seglist,
although other extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer searches
the current directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
466
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
Assume that the current setup contains two channels numbered 1
and 2, respectively, and that sweep segments have been defined
for channel no. 1.
:MMEM:STOR:SEGM 1,
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\SweepSegments\Seg_Ch1.seglist'
Store the sweep segment definition of channel 1 to a sweep
segment file.
MMEM:LOAD:SEGM 2,
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\SweepSegments\Seg_Ch1.seglist'
Load the previously created sweep segment file and use the
sweep segments for channel 2.
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <numeric_value>,'<file_name>'
Loads configuration data from a specified device settings file and sets the analyzer to the corresponding
instrument state.
<numeric_value> 1 (the <numeric_value> is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is
ignored).
<file_name> String parameter to specify the name and directory of the settings file to be
loaded. The default extension for settings files is *.zvl.dfl (see
MMEMory:STORe:STATe). This extension may be omitted when a settings file
is loaded.
If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory, to be queried
with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Setup_0413.zvl.dfl'
Store the current configuration to the file
Setup_0413.zvl.dfl in the default directory for settings
files.
MMEM:STOR:STAT:NEXT
Store the current configuration to the file
Setup_0414.zvl.dfl in the default directory for settings
files.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Setup_0413.zvl.dfl'
Load the settings stored in Setup_0413.zvl.dfl.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
467
MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe '<trc_name>','<file_name>'[,'<parameter_name>']
Loads trace data from a specified trace file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name. Traces are
created using the CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine... command.
'<trc_name>' Name of an existing data trace in the active setup (string parameter). The
trace data is loaded into a memory trace associated with the specified data
trace. If one or more memory traces are already associated with the
specified data trace, the last generated memory trace is overwritten.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the trace file to be
loaded. Several file formats for trace files are supported. If no path is
specified the analyzer searches the current directory, to be queried with
MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
The file extensions *.s<n>p, *.csv, and *.dat for Touchstone, ASCII, and
Matlab files are mandatory.
'<parameter_name>' Optional string parameter for imported Touchstone files for more than one
port (*.s2p, *.s3p, *.s4p), denotes the imported S-parameter ('S11', 'S12', ...).
If nothing is specified, the first trace in the specified file is imported.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example:
Assume that the current setup contains a trace named
Trc1.
MMEM:STOR:TRAC 'TRC1',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Traces\Trc1.s1p'
Store the current trace data of Trc1 to a trace file.
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC 'TRC1',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Traces\Trc1.s1p'
Load the previously created trace file and create a
memory trace assigned to Trc1.
CALC:PAR:DEF:SGR 1,2
Create four traces to measure the two-port S-parameters S
11
, S
12
, S
21
, S
22
.
The traces are not displayed.
MMEM:STOR:TRAC 'TRC1',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Traces\Trc1.s2p'
Store the four S-parameter traces to a two-port
Touchstone file.
MMEM:LOAD:TRAC 'TRC1',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Traces\Trc1.s2p'
Load the previously created Touchstone file and
overwrite the previously generated memory trace assigned
to Trc1 with the S
11
trace.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
468
MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt> '<file_name>'
Loads data from a specified two-port (*.sp2) Touchstone file defining the characteristics of the current
deembedded single ended port circuit model. The single ended port circuit model involving file import
(FIMPort) must be selected before using the command.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt> Physical port number
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file. If
no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory, to be queried with
MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:TND FIMP
Select the Serial .s2p data, shunt L circuit model.
MMEM:LOAD:VNET:SEND:DEEM2
'C:\Rohde&Schwarz\NWA\VNETWORKS\Test.s2p'
Load a Touchstone file and assign it to the physical port no.
2.
MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt> '<file_name>'
Loads data from a specified two-port (*.sp2) Touchstone file defining the characteristics of the current
embedded single ended port circuit model. The single ended port circuit model involving file import
(FIMPort) must be selected before using the command.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Ph_pt>
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file. If
no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory, to be queried with
MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:TND FIMP
Select the Serial .s2p data, shunt L circuit model.
MMEM:LOAD:VNET:SEND:EMB2
'C:\Rohde&Schwarz\NWA\VNETWORKS\Test.s2p'
Load a Touchstone file and assign it to the physical port no.
2.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
469
MMEMory:MDIRectory '<directory_name>'
Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in an existing directory.
'<directory_name>' String parameter to specify the new directory. Either the full path or a
subdirectory for the current directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory).
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:MDIR 'C:\Documents and Settings\New_Directory'
Create the specified directory. The parent directory
'C:\Documents and Settings' must have been created
before.
MMEM:MDIR 'C:\Documents and
Settings\New_Directory\New_Subdirectory'
Create an additional subdirectory.
MMEM:CDIR 'C:'; MDIR 'New_Rootdirectory'
Create an additional directory C:\New Rootdirectory.
MMEMory:MOVE '<file_source>','<file_destination>'
Moves a file to the indicated directory and stores it under the file name specified, if any. If
<file_destination> contains no path indication, the command renames the file without moving it.
'<file_source>',
'<file_destination>'
String parameters to specify the name and the path of the file to be
copied and the name and the path of the new file.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query.
Example:
MMEM:MOVE 'C:\USER\DATA\SETUP.ZVL.DFL','E:'
Move file Setup.zvl.dfl in directory C:\USER\DATA to
the external storage medium, mapped to drive E:\.
MMEMory:MSIS '<drive_name>'
Selects a default mass storage device which is used by some of the MMEMory commands. The command
does not reset the current directory (MMEMory:CDIRectory).
'<drive_name>' String parameter to specify the drive. 'c:' for the internal hard disk. Other
external storage devices (e.g. a memory stick connected to one of the USB
ports, a network connection) are mapped to any free drive letter.
*RST value C:
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, with query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
470
Example:
MMEM:MSIS 'C:'
Select internal hard disk..
MMEMory:NAME '<file_name>'
Defines a name for a file which can be used to store the printer output. The file is created when it is
selected as a printer destination (HCOPy:DESTination 'MMEM').
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the file name. The supported file formats are *.gdi,
*.wmf, *.ewmf, *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png; see command HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage. The
specified directory must exist, otherwise no file can be generated. If no path is
specified the analyzer uses the current directory, to be queried with
MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Print'
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, with query.
Example:
MMEM:NAME 'C:\Screenshots\PLOT1.BMP'
Define a printer file name, to be stored in the existing
directory C:\Screenshots (without creating the file).
HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'; HCOP
Select 'Print to file' and create the printer file specified
before.
MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect '<drive_name>'
Disconnects the selected (and previously mapped) network drive.
'<drive_name>' String parameter to specify the drive.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:NETW:USED ON
List all mapped network drives including the folder
information.
MMEM:NETW:UNUS?
List all unused network drive names.
MMEM:NETW:MAP 'T:','\\server\folder'
Map drive T: to folder on server.
MMEM:NETW:DISC 'T:'
Disconnect drive T:.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
471
MMEMory:NETWork:MAP '<drive_name>', '<host_name>'[, '<user_name>',
'<password>'][,<Boolean>]
Maps a drive to a server or server folder of the network. As a prerequisite in Microsoft networks, sharing of
this server or server folder must be enabled.
'<drive_name>' String parameter to specify the drive.
'<host_name>' String parameter in the format '\\<host name or IP address>\<share
name>'
'<user_name>' Sting parameter to specify a user name
'<password>' Sting parameter to specify a password
<Boolean> ON | OFF Enable/disable reconnect at logon
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect
MMEMory:NETWork:UNUSeddrives?
Lists all unused network drive names.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, query only.
Example:
See MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect
MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives <Boolean>
List all used network drives.
<Boolean> ON include folder information
OFF list of drive names only
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. The query returns the list of drive names
without folder information.
Example:
See MMEMory:NETWork:DISConnect
MMEMory:RDIRectory '<directory_name>'
Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system.
'<directory_name>' String parameter to specify the directory.
*RST value
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
472
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:RDIR 'C:\Documents and
Settings\NetworkService\Application Data'
Remove the specified directory.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL
Includes all data subsets in the list of device settings to be stored/loaded.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL
Select all data subsets.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault
Sets the default list of device settings to be stored/loaded. For details on hardware settings refer to the
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings command.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example: MMEM:SEL:DEFault
Set the default list of device settings.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings <Boolean>
Includes the hardware settings in the list of data subsets of a device setting to be stored/loaded.
The hardware settings include:
current configuration of general device parameters (general setup)
current setting of the measurement hardware including markers
activated limit lines
A data set may include 8 limit lines at maximum. This number includes the activated limit lines
and, if available, the deactivated limit lines last used.
Therefore the combination of the nonactivated restored limit lines depends on the sequence of
use with the MMEMory:LOAD:STATe command.
userdefined color setting
configuration for the hardcopy output
<Boolean> ON | OFF Includes the hardware settings in the list of data subsets or
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
473
excludes them.
*RST value ON
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example: MMEM:SEL:HWS ON
Select the hardware settings.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL <Boolean>
Adds all limit lines (activated and deactivated) to the list of device settings to be stored/loaded.
<Boolean> ON | OFF Includes the limit lines in the list of data subsets or excludes
them.
*RST value ON
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example: MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON
Select the limit lines.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE
Deletes all data subsets from the list of device settings to be stored/loaded.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example: MMEM:SEL:NONE
Exclude all data subsets.
MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] <Boolean>
Adds the active traces to the list of data subsets of a save/recall device setting. Active traces are all
traces whose state is not blank.
<Boolean> ON Includes the active traces in the list of data subsets.
OFF No traces will be stored.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example: MMEM:SEL:TRAC ON
Select the active traces.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
474
MMEMory:STORe:CABLe '<target_directory>'
Copies all pre-defined and user-defined cable description files (*.rsc) to a specified directory. The contents
of the source directories for cable description files (C:\R_S\Instr\resources\Nwa\CableTypes for
predefined, C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\CableTypes for user-defined cables) are not affected.
'<target_directory>' String parameter to specify the target directory.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:CABL 'c:\temp'
Copy all *rsc files from the source directories (see
above) to C:\temp.
After a possible modification of the *.rsc files in
c:\temp:
MMEM:LOAD:CABL 'c:\temp'
Re-load all *rsc files from C:\temp. The files remain
in c:temp; they are not copied to the default
directories for cable description files.
MMEMory:STORe:CKIT '<kit_name>', '<file_name>'
Stores the data of a calibration kit to a specified file.
'<kit_name>' Name of a user-defined calibration kit available on the analyzer.
It is not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be created.
The file is a NWA-specific cal kit file with the extension *.calkit. If no path is specified
the analyzer uses the current directory, to be queried with
MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:CKIT
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit'
Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit.calkit from
the default cal kit directory.
... :MMEM:STOR:CKIT 'New_kit',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit'
Store the data for the user-defined cal kit Newkit and
overwrite the cal kit file New_kit.calkit.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
475
MMEMory:STORe:CMAP '<file_name>'
Stores a color scheme to a specified NWA color scheme file.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the color scheme file to be
created. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory, to be
queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?. The default extension (manual control) for
color scheme files is *.ColorScheme, although other extensions are allowed.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:CMAP
MMEMory:STORe:CORRection <Ch>,'<file_name>'
Copies the correction data of channel <Ch> to the cal pool, generating a new correction data file (cal
group). The file has the extension *.calkit and is stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Data
directory.
<Ch> Channel number
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name of the created cal group file. The directory
path must not be specified; the analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory
C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Data.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection
MMEMory:STORe:LIMit '<trc_name>', '<file_name>'
Saves the limit lines associated with a specified trace to a limit line file. Limit lines are created using the
CALCulte<Chn>:LIMit... commands.
'<trc_name>' Name of an existing trace in the active setup (string parameter) for which a limit
line definition exists.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created limit line file. The
default extension (manual control) for limit line files is *.limit, although other
extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current
directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
476
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit.
MMEMory:STORe:MARKer '<file_name>'
Saves the values of all markers to a ASCII file.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created ASCII file. The
default extension (manual control) for marker files is *.txt, although other
extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current
directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?. An example for the file
contents is given below.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
*RST
Reset the analyzer, creating the default trace no. 1 in
channel no. 1.
CALC:MARK ON; MARK:X 1GHz
Create marker no. 1 and place it to 1 GHz.
CALC:MARK2 ON; MARK2:X 2GHz
Create a second marker and place it to 2 GHz.
MMEM:STOR:MARK 'Marker.txt'
Store the marker values to an ASCII file. The file contains
both marker values:
MMEMory:STORe:NWANalyzer <numeric_value>,'<file_name>'
Stores the configuration data of the current setup to a specified setup file.
MMEMory:STORe:NWANalyzer renames the current setup, appending a .nwa extension. See
example for MMEMory:LOAD:NWANalyzer.
<numeric_value> 1 (the <numeric_value> is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is
ignored).
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created setup file.
The default extension (manual control) for setup files is *.nwa, although other
extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current
directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Confirmed, no query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
477
Types
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:NWANalyzer.
MMEMory:STORe:RIPPle '<trc_name>', '<file_name>'
Saves the ripple limits associated with a specified trace to a ripple limit file. Ripple limit definitions are
created using the CALCulte<Chn>:RIPPle... commands.
'<trc_name>' Name of an existing trace in the active setup (string parameter) for which a ripple
limit definition exists.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created ripple limit file.
The default extension (manual control) for ripple limit files is *.ripple, although
other extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current
directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit.
MMEMory:STORe:SEGMent <Ch>, '<file_name>'
Saves the sweep segment definition of a specified channel to a sweep segment file. Sweep segments are
defined using the [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... commands.
<Ch> Channel number.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created sweep segment
file. The default extension (manual control) for sweep segment files is *.seglist,
although other extensions are allowed. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the
current directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:SEGMent.
MMEMory:STORe:STATe <numeric_value>,'<file_name>'
Stores the configuration data of the current device settings to a specified settings file.
<numeric_value> 1 (the <numeric_value> is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is
ignored).
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created settings file.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
478
The default extension for settings files is *.zvl.dfl. MMEMory:STORe:STATe
automatically appends the default extension, if a file name without extension (or
with a different extension) is specified. It is allowed though to re-name settings
files using other extensions. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current
directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
MMEMory:STORe:STATe:NEXT
Stores the configuration data of the current data set to a data set file using the file name used in the last
saving process. This file name is automatically counted up to the next unused name.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe '<trc_name>','<file_name>'[,UNFormatted | FORMatted,
COMPlex | LINPhase | LOGPhase, POINt | COMMa, SEMicolon | COMMa |
TABulator | SPACe]
Stores the trace data of a specified trace to a trace file. Traces are created using the
CALCulte<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine... command.
*.s<n>p Touchstone files (<n> = 1, 2, 3, ...) are intended for a complete set of <n>-port S-parameters.
Data export fails if the active channel does not contain the full set of <n>
2
traces. If the necessary trace
are available, '<trc_name>' can be the name of any of the traces.
'<trc_name>' Name of an existing data trace in the active setup (string parameter).
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created trace file.
Several file formats for trace files are supported. The file extensions *.s<n>p,
*.csv, and *.dat for Touchstone, ASCII, and Matlab files are mandatory.
To generate a multiport Touchstone file *.s2p, *.s3p..., the channel must contain
traces for the full set of S-parameters; the '<trc_name>' is ignored.
If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory, to be queried with
MMEMory:CDIRectory?.
Optional
parameters
UNFormatted Unformatted data export specified by the second optional
parameter
FORMatted Formatted data export (for *.csv and *.dat files only)
If the first optional parameter is omitted the command stores unformatted data.
COMPlex Complex values (real and imaginary part)
LINPhase Linear magnitude and phase
LOGPhase dB-magnitude and phase
If the second optional parameter is omitted the command stores complex data.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
479
POINt Decimal separator: point
COMMa Decimal separator: comma
If the third optional parameter is omitted, points are used.
SEMicolon Field separator: semicolon
COMMa Field separator: comma
TABulator Field separator: tabulator
SPACe Field separator: space
If the fourth optional parameter is omitted, semicolons are used.
*RST value (the default export format is UNFormatted)
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe.
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER...
The MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER... subsystem configures the custom header for trace files.
A *RST does not change the custom header settings. Press the Use Default Directories button in the
System Configuration dialog (Nwa-Setup System Config.) to reset the settings.
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:CINFormation <Boolean>
Qualifies whether the calibration information is included in the custom header.
<Boolean> ON | OFF calibration information included/omitted
*RST value ON (after Use Default Directories)
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example: MMEM:STORe:TRAC:USER:IINF OFF; DATE OFF; CINF OFF
Omit instrument information, date and time, and calibration information in the
custom header.
MMEM:STORe:TRAC:USER:TEXT:STAT ON
Include user notes in the custom header.
MMEM:STORe:TRAC:USER:TEXT 'Transmission coefficient S21 for DUT no. 1'
Define user notes.
MMEM:STORe:TRAC:USER:STAT ON
Apply custom header to all trace files created subsequently.
MMEM:STOR:TRAC 'TRC1', 'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Traces\Trc1.s1p'
Store the current trace (named Trc1) to a file, including the custom header. The
custom header consists of a single line: ! Transmission coefficient S21 for DUT no.
1
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
480
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:DATE <Boolean>
Qualifies whether the date and time is included in the custom header.
<Boolean> ON | OFF date and time included/omitted
*RST value ON (after Use Default Directories)
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:CINFormation
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:IINFormation <Boolean>
Qualifies whether the instrument information is included in the custom header.
<Boolean> ON | OFF instrument information included/omitted
*RST value ON (after Use Default Directories)
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:CINFormation
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:STATe <Boolean>
Qualifies whether the custom header is written to the trace file.
<Boolean> ON | OFF custom header used/not used
*RST value OFF (after Use Default Directories)
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:CINFormation
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:TEXT '<text>'
Defines the user notes for the custom header.
'<target_directory>' String parameter to specify the user notes
*RST value ' ' (empty string, after Use Default Directories))
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query.
Example:
See MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:CINFormation
MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:TEXT:STATe <Boolean>
Qualifies whether the user notes are included in the custom header.
<Boolean> ON | OFF user notes used/not used
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
481
*RST value ON (after Use Default Directories)
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
See MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:USER:CINFormation
OUTPut<Pt>...
This subsystem controls the characteristics of the analyzers output ports.
OUTPut<Chn>:DPORt PORT1 | PORT2
Selects a source port for the stimulus signal (drive port). The setting acts on the active trace. The effect of
the drive port selection depends on the measurement parameter associated with the active trace:
If an S-parameter S
<out><in>
is measured, the second port number index <in> (input port of the DUT
= drive port of the analyzer) is set equal to the selected drive port: Drive port selection affects the
measured quantity.
If a wave quantity or a ratio is measured, the drive port is independent from the measured
quantity:
Note: This command is equivalent to [SENSe<Chn>:]SWEep:SRCPort.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. If unspecified the numeric
suffix is set to 1.
PORT1 ... Test port number of the analyzer, 1 to 2.
*RST value PORT1
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, with query.
Example:
CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'A1'
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wave quantity a1.
The trace automatically becomes the active trace.
OUTP4:DPOR PORT2
Select drive port 2 for the active trace.
OUTPut<Ch>[:STATe] <Boolean>
Turns the internal source power at all ports and the power of all external generators on or off.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored; the setting is valid for all channels.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Switches the power on or off.
*RST value ON
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
OUTP OFF
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
482
Turn off the RF source power.
PROGram...
This subsystem controls external application programs that can be run on the analyzer.
PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute '<file_name>[ <command>]'
Starts an application program or open a file using an application available on the analyzer.
'<file_name>' Name and path of an application program to be executed or of a file to be opened.
The path can be defined as an absolute path (e.g. 'c:\...') or relative to the current
directory (MMEMory:CDIRectory). Blanks in the file name are not allowed because
everything after a blank is interpreted as a <command>.
<command> Command name in the selected application <file_name> (optional).
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, no query.
Example: PROG:SEL:NAME PROG
Selects general program execution on the analyzer.
MMEM:CDIR 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\Bin'
Go to the program directory.
PROG:EXEC 'iecwin32.exe'
Start the application iecwin32.
PROG:EXEC:WAIT
Lock command execution and manual control of the analyzer until iecwin32 is
paused or stopped.
PROGram[:SELected]:NAME PROG
Selects the application to be run on the analyzer. At present, only the general parameter PROG is
available: PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute can start any program.
Use this command in order to avoid problems should the default value change in future firmware
versions.
PROG Any program running under Windows XP or any file that can be opened with an
application program available on the analyzer.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
483
*RST value PROG
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example:
See PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute.
PROGram[:SELected]:WAIT
Locks command execution and manual control of the analyzer while a program started via
PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute is running. The analyzer does not execute any further commands or
queries until the program is stopped or paused.
Parameters None.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query. The query also locks command execution; it
returns 1 when the executed program is stopped or paused.
Example:
See PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute.
[SENSe...]
[SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage...
This subsystem sets sweep averaging parameters. The sweep average is a noise-reduction technique
which consists of calculating each measurement point as an average of the same measurement point over
several consecutive sweeps.
[SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:CLEar
Starts a new average cycle, clearing all previous results and thus eliminating their effect on the new cycle.
<Ch> Channel number. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query
Example:
AVER:COUN 15; AVER ON
Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15 and enable the sweep average.
AVER:COUN 5; CLE
Reduce the average factor and restart the average.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
484
[SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:COUNt <numeric_value>
Defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be combined for the sweep average (Average Factor).
<Ch> Channel number.
<numeric_value> Average factor
Range [def. unit] 1 to 1000 [1]
*RST value 10
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
AVER:COUN 15
Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15.
AVER ON
Enable the sweep average.
[SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage[:STATe] <Boolean>
Enable or disable the sweep average.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Enables or disables the automatic calculation of the sweep average
over the specified number of sweeps ([SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:COUNt).
*RST value ON
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
AVER:COUN 15
Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15.
AVER ON
Enable the sweep average over the defined number of sweeps.
[SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth...
This subsystem sets the bandwidth of the IF measurement filter (resolution bandwidth) and the filter type.
The forms BANDwidth and BWIDth are equivalent.
[SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <bandwidth>
Defines the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer (Meas Bandwidth).
<Ch> Channel number. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
<bandwidth> Resolution bandwidth
Range [def. unit] 10 Hz to 500 kHz. UP and DOWN increment/decrement the bandwidth in 1-2-5
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
485
steps for each decade. The analyzer rounds up any entered value between these
steps and rounds down values exceeding the maximum bandwidth.
*RST value 10 kHz
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
BAND 1.1
Set a resolution bandwidth of approx. 1.1 Hz for channel 1.
BAND?
The analyzer returns the rounded bandwidth of 2 Hz.
[SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect FAST | NORMal
Defines the selectivity of the IF filter for an unsegmented sweep. The value is also used for all segments
of a segmented sweep, provided that separate selectivity setting is disabled
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect:CONTrol OFF).
<Ch> Channel number.
FAST Use IF filter short settling time.
NORMal Use IF filter with higher selectivity but larger settling time.
*RST value FAST
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect:CONTrol
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection...
This subsystem controls system error correction and recording of correction data.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CDATa 'DIRECTIVITY' | 'SRCMATCH' | 'REFLTRACK' |
'ISOLATION' | 'LOADMATCH' | 'TRANSTRACK', <port1_no>, <port2_no>
Writes or reads system error correction data for a specific channel <Ch>, calibration method
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine), and port combination <Port1_no>, <Port2_no>.
The setting command can be used to transfer user-defined correction data to the analyzer; the query
returns the current correction data set. ASCII or block data can be transferred, depending on the selected
data transfer format (FORMat[:DATA]).
The sweep must be stopped to transfer calibration data; see program example for
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:DEFault.
For an overview of calibration methods and error terms refer to section Calibration Types.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
486
1.
Error term
parameters
String parameters describing the different error terms, depending on the current
calibration method; see table below. Each term contains one complex value (real and
imaginary part) for each sweep point.
Range [def.
unit]
The error terms consist of dimensionless complex numbers. The parameters must be
transferred in full length and have the following meaning:
'DIRECTIVITY' Directivity at port <port1_no>
'SRCMATCH' Source match at port <port1_no>
'REFLTRACK' Reflection tracking at port <port1_no>
'ISOLATION' Isolation between port <port1_no> and <port2_no>
'LOADMATCH' Load match at <port2_no>
'TRANSTRACK' Transmission tracking between port <port1_no> and <port2_no>
*RST value
The analyzer provides a default calibration corresponding to a test setup which does
not introduce any systematic errors; see
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault.
<port1_no> Source port number.
<port2_no> Load port number. If the error term is not related to the load port, a dummy number
can be used; e.g. CORR:CDAT 'REFLTRACK', 1, 0
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault.
The different calibration types of the analyzer provide the following error terms:
Calibration type Parameters in
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine
Available error terms (depending
on port numbers)
One-port
normalization
(reflection)
using an open or a
short standard
REFL, RSHort 'REFLTRACK'
Full one port FOPort 'DIRECTIVITY', 'SRCMATCH',
'REFLTRACK'
Two-port
normalization
FRTRans 'TRANSTRACK'
One path two port OPTPort 'DIRECTIVITY', 'SRCMATCH',
'REFLTRACK', 'TRANSTRACK'
TOSM TOSM 'DIRECTIVITY', 'SRCMATCH',
'REFLTRACK', 'LOADMATCH',
'TRANSTRACK'
(at present the 'ISOLATION' terms are
not included)
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT...
This subsystem controls system error correction and recording of correction data.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<std_type>
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
487
'<Conn_Name>','<Ckit_Name>','<Std_No>',<Min_Freq>,<Max_Freq>,<El_Length>,<
Loss>,<Z0>,<C0> , <C1>, <C2>, <C3>, <L0>, <L1>, <L2>, <L3>[, OPEN | SHORt |
MATCh, <Resistance>, <Port_1>, <Port_2>]
Defines the parameters of a non-ideal 1 port or 2-port calibration standard <std_type>. A particular
physical standard can be selected by specifying the name of the calibration kit and its serial number.
Depending on the standard type, only a subset of the parameters may be used; see table below.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel-
independent.
<std_type> Standard type. For reflection standards, the first character denotes the gender, e.g.:
FOPEN, MOPEN: Open (f) or Open (m) standard.
The following reflection standards are supported: MOPen, FOPen, MSHort,
FSHort, OSHort, MOSHort, FOSHort, MMTCh, FFTCh, MREFLect,
FREFLect
For transmission standards, the first two characters denotes the genders on both
ends, e.g.:
FFSNetwork, MFSNetwork, MMSNetwork: Symm. network (ff), symm. network
(mf) or symm. network (mm) standard.
For a complete list of standard types refer to the table of standard types below.
Parameter
list
String parameters to specify the configured standard
('<Conn_Name>','<Ckit_Name>','<Std_No>') and numeric parameters defining its
properties. See detailed description below.
The following transmission standards have only 8 parameters (until <Z0>):
MMTHrough, MFTHrough, FFTHrough, MMLine, MFLine, FFLine
The following reflection and transmission standards have only 5 parameters
(until <Max_Freq>):
MSMatch, FSMatch, MMATten, MFATten, FFATten
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query (see examples below)
Example:
CORR:CKIT:FOP 'N 50 Ohm','Test Kit',...
Define the properties of the open (f) standard for a N 50 V connector type in cal kit
'Test Kit'. See also example for
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:<std_type>.
CORR:CKIT:FOP? 'N 50 Ohm'
Query the properties of the open (f) standard for a N 50 V connector type in the
active cal kit.
CORR:CKIT:FOP? 'N 50 Ohm','Test Kit'
Query the properties of the open (f) standard for a N 50 V connector type in cal kit
'Test Kit'.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
488
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:<std_type>
'<Ckit_Name>','<Std_No>',<Min_Freq>,<Max_Freq>,<El_Length>,<Loss>,<C0> |
<L0>,<C1> | <L1>,<C2> | <L2>,<C3> | <L3>, OPEN | SHORt
Defines the parameters of a calibration standard <std_type> for a specified connector type <conn_type>.
A particular physical standard can be selected by specifying the name of the calibration kit and its serial
number. Depending on the standard type, only a subset of the parameters may be used; see table below.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel-
independent.
<conn_type> Connector type, one of the following identifiers:
N50, N75: N 50 V or N 75 V connectors
PC7, PC35, PC292: PC 7, PC 3.5 or 2.92 mm connectors
USER<no>: User-defined connectors UserConn1, UserConn2
This command only supports ZVR-compatible connector types. For general
definitions use [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<std_type>.
<std_type> Standard type. For reflection standards, the first character denotes the gender, e.g.:
FOPEN, MOPEN: Open (f) or Open (m) standard.
For transmission standards, the first two characters denotes the genders on both
ends, e.g.:
FFTHrough, MFTHrough, MMTHrough: Through (ff), Through (mf) or Through
(mm) standard.
For a complete list of standard types refer to the table of standard types below.
Parameter list String parameters to specify the configured standard ('<Ckit_Name>','<Std_No>')
and numeric parameters defining its properties. See detailed description below.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
CORR:CKIT:N50:FOPEN 'ZV-Z21','',0,1.8E+010,0.0151,0,0,0.22,-0.22,0.0022
Define the properties of the open (f) standard for the N 50 V connector type
contained in the ZV-Z21 calibration kit: Assign a valid frequency range of 0 Hz to 18
GHz, an electrical length of 15.1 mm, 0 dB loss and define the polynomial
coefficients of the fringing capacitance as 0 fF, 0.22 fF/GHz, 0.22 fF/(GHz)
2
,
0.0022 fF/(GHz)
3
.
The parameters in the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<std_type> and
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:<std_type> commands have the following
meaning:
Parameter Meaning Comment/Unit
'<Conn_Name>' Name of the connector type String parameter
'<Ckit_Name>' Name of the calibration kit String parameter
'<Std_No>' Label (e.g. the serial number) of the standard String parameter
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
489
<Min_Freq> Min. frequency for which the circuit model is valid Default unit is Hz
<Max_Freq> Max. frequency for which the circuit model is valid Default unit is Hz
<El_Length> Electrical length (offset parameter) of the standard Default unit is m or ft,
depending on the Distance
Unit setting in the System
Configuration dialog
<Loss> Loss (offset parameter) of the standard To be specified without
unit (implicit unit is dB)
<Z0> Reference impedance (no unit) To be specified without
unit (implicit unit is V)
<C0> | <L0> Polynomial coefficients C0 or L0 for the fringing capacitance or residual
inductance of the standard (load parameter)
To be specified without
unit (implicit unit is fF or
pH)
<C1> | <L1> Polynomial coefficients C1 or L1 for the fringing capacitance or residual
inductance of the standard (load parameter)
To be specified without
unit (implicit unit is fF /GHz
or pH /GHz)
<C2> | <L2> Polynomial coefficients C2 or L2 for the fringing capacitance or residual
inductance of the standard (load parameter)
To be specified without
unit (implicit unit is
fF/GHz
2
or pH/GHz
2
)
<C3> | <L3> Polynomial coefficients C3 or L3 for the fringing capacitance or residual
inductance of the standard (load parameter)
To be specified without
unit (implicit unit is
fF/GHz
3
or pH/GHz
3
)
OPEN | SHORt |
MATCh
Simplified modelling as an open or short or match standard. The load
circuit model generally consists of capacitance C which is connected in
parallel to an inductance L and a resistance R, both connected in series.
OPEN means that R is infinite so that the standard behaves like a
capacitor (no inductance, the polynomial coefficients specify C). SHORt
means that R is zero so that the standard behaves like an inductance (no
capacitance, the polynomial coefficients specify L). MATCh means that
the standard behaves like a match with the specified <Resistance>
Character data
<Resistance> Optional resistance for the MATCh standard Numeric value
, <Port_1>,
<Port_2>
Optional port restriction: one port number for one port standards, two port
numbers for two port standards
Integer value
The different standard types are defined by the following parameters:
<std_type> Meaning Parameters
MOPen | FOPen Open (m) or open (f) '<Ckit_Name>' ... <C3>[, <Port_1>]
complete parameter list with capacitance
coefficients, no OPEN | SHORT | MATCh
MSHort | FSHort Short (m) or short (f) '<Ckit_Name>' ... <L3>[, <Port_1>]
complete parameter list with inductance
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
490
coefficients, no OPEN | SHORT| MATCh
OSHort | MOSHort |
FOSHort
Offset short (sexless) or offset short (m)
or offset short (f)
(for user-defined connector types only)
'<Ckit_Name>' ... <L3>[, <Port_1>]
complete parameter list with inductance
coefficients, no OPEN | SHORT| MATCh
MMTCh | FMTCh Match (m) or match (f) '<Ckit_Name>' ... <Max_Freq>[, <Port_1>]
no offset parameters, no polynomial coefficients,
no OPEN | SHORt| MATCh
MREFlect | FREFlect Reflect (m) or reflect (f) '<Ckit_Name>' ... OPEN | SHORt[, <Port_1>]
no loss, otherwise complete parameter list
MMTHrough | MFTHrough |
FFTHrough
Through (m - m) or through (m - f) or
through (f - f)
'<Ckit_Name>' ... <Loss>[, <Port_1>, <Port_2>]
no load parameters (polynomial coefficients), no
OPEN | SHORt| MATCh
MMLIne1 | MFLIne1 |
FFLIne1 (suffix 1 optional)
Line1 (m - m) or line1 (m - f) or line1 (f - f) '<Ckit_Name>' ... <Loss>[, <Port_1>, <Port_2>]
no load parameters (polynomial coefficients), no
OPEN | SHORt| MATCh
MMLIne2 | MFLIne2 |
FFLIne2
Line1 (m - m) or line2 (m - f) or line2 (f - f) '<Ckit_Name>' ... <Loss>[, <Port_1>, <Port_2>]
no load parameters (polynomial coefficients), no
OPEN | SHORt| MATCh
MMATten | MFATten |
FFATten
Attenuation (m - m) or attenuation (m - f)
or attenuation (f - f)
'<Ckit_Name>' ... <Max_Freq>[, <Port_1>,
<Port_2>]
no offset parameters, no load parameters
(polynomial coefficients), no OPEN | SHORt|
MATCh
MMSNetwork |
MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork
Symmetric network (m - m) or symmetric
network (m - f) or symmetric network (f -
f)
'<Ckit_Name>' ... OPEN | SHORt| MATCh[,
<Port_1>, <Port_2>]
no loss, otherwise complete parameter list
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:SELect '<ckit_name>'
Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type <conn_type>.
For connector types with arbitrary, user-defined names you can use the command
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:SELect '<conn_name>', '<ckit_name>'.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel-
independent.
<conn_type> Connector type, one of the following identifiers:
N50, N75: N 50 V or N 75 V connectors
PC7, PC35, PC292: PC 7, PC 3.5 or 2.92 mm connectors
USER<no>: User-defined connectors UserConn1, UserConn2
'<ckit_name>' String parameters containing the name of a calibration kit available on the
analyzer.
*RST value (A *RST does not change the assignment between connector types and
calibration kits.)
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
491
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:CKIT
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit'
Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit.calkit from
the default cal kit directory.
CORR:CKIT:N50:SEL 'New_kit'
Assign the imported kit to the N 50 V connector type (assuming that the cal kit
name stored in New_kit.calkit reads New_kit).
Cal kit naming conventions
Calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters. The string contains the cal kit name used in
the Calibration Kits dialog; a V in the name must be replaced by 'Ohm', e.g.:
'NewKit1' denotes the user-defined calibration kit NewKit1.
'N 50 Ohm Ideal Kit' denotes the N 50 V Ideal Kit.
'ZV-Z21 typical' denotes the cal kit ZV-Z21 typical.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:SELect '<conn_name>', '<ckit_name>'
Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type <conn_type>.
The command is suitable for connector types with arbitrary, user-defined names. For standard
connector types you can use the command
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:SELect.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel-
independent.
'<conn_name>' Connector type, e.g. a user-defined connector type (string variable)
'<ckit_name>' String parameters containing the name of a calibration kit available on the
analyzer.
*RST value (A *RST does not change the assignment between connector types and
calibration kits.)
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query (the query requires the first string parameter
only)
Example:
MMEM:LOAD:CKIT
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit'
Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit.calkit from
the default cal kit directory.
CORR:CKIT:SEL 'N 50 Ohm', 'New_kit'
Assign the imported kit to the N 50 V connector type (assuming that the cal kit
name stored in New_kit.calkit reads New_kit).
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
492
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:INSTall '<file_name>'
Loads cal kit data from a specified ZVR cal kit file.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel-
independent.
'<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be loaded.
Note: The loaded file must be a ZVR-specific cal kit file with the extension *.ck.
NWA cal kit files (*.calkit) can be imported using the MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT
command. Agilent cal kit files can be imported manually and converted into
*.calkit files.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
CORR:CKIT:INST
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\ZCAN.ck'
Load the previously created ZVR cal kit file ZCAN.ck from the
default cal kit directory.
MMEM:STOR:CKIT 'ZCAN',
'C:\R_S\Instr\user\Nwa\Calibration\Kits\ZCAN.calkit'
Store the imported cal kit data to a NWA cal kit file
ZCAN.calkit (assuming that the cal kit name stored in ZCAN.ck
reads ZCAN).
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect...
This subsystem controls the system error correction and manages calibration kits.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN1 | OPEN2 |
OPEN12 | SHORT1 | SHORT2 | SHORT12 | MATCH1 | MATCH2 | MATCH12 | NET |
ATT | IMATCH12 | REFL1 | REFL2 | SLIDe1 | SLIDE2 | SLIDE12 | LINE1 | LINE2 |
M1O2 | O1M2 | M1S2 | S1M2 | OSHORT1 | OSHORT2
Starts a calibration measurement in order to acquire measurement data for the selected standards. The
standards are reflection or transmission standards and must be connected to port 1 or 2 of the analyzer.
Use the generalized command [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected to
obtain measurement data at arbitrary analyzer ports.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
THRough ...
OSHORT2
Standard types: Through, Open, Short, Match (MATCH12 and IMATCH12 are
synonymous), Symmetric Network (NET), Attenuation (ATT), Reflect, Sliding Match
(SLIDe), Line1 (LINE1 and LINE are synonymous), Line2, Match/Open (M1O2,
O1M2), Match/Short (M1S2, S1M2), Offset Short (OSHort).
The numbers in the parameters denote the analyzer ports. Two numbers 12 mean that
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
493
two separate calibrations are performed at ports 1 and 2.
*RST value ON
AUTO |
<delay |
phase>
Optional entry of delay time or phase for UTHRough standard:
AUTO The analyzer determines the delay time or phase during the calibration sweep
<delay or phase> entry of the delay time in ps (for non-dispersive standards) or of an
estimate of the phase at the start frequency of the sweep in deg (for dispersive
standards). If an estimate of the start phase is entered, the analyzer uses the
calculated value which is closest to the estimate.
*RST value AUTO
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed (with device-specific standards), no query
Example: See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:RSAVe <Boolean>
Activates or deactivates the calibration mode where the raw measurement data of the standards is stored
after the calibration is completed. The setting is valid for the current calibration, where it overwrites the
global setting ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:RSAVe:DEFault). A new
calibration deletes the calibration data acquired in previous calibrations.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Keep measurement data on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
CORR:COLL:RSAV:DEF ON
Generally keep the raw measurement data of the standards after the
calibration is completed.
CORR:COLL:METH:DEF 'Test',RSHort,1
Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration
type.
CORR:COLL:SEL SHOR,1
Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the raw measurement
results of this standard.
CORR:COLL:RSAV OFF
To save disk space, delete the current raw calibration data after the calibration
is completed.
CORR:COLL:SAVE:SEL
Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active
channel.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
494
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:RSAVe:DEFault <Boolean>
Activates or deactivates the calibration mode where the raw measurement data of the standards is stored
after the calibration is completed. The setting remains valid for all subsequent calibrations until it is
changed explicitly. A new calibration deletes the calibration data acquired in previous calibrations.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Keep measurement data on or off.
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:AQUire]:RSAVe.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected THRough | OPEN |
SHORt | MATCh | NET | ATT | REFL | SLIDE | LINE1 | LINE2,<port_no>,<port_no>
Starts a calibration measurement in order to acquire measurement data for the selected standards. The
standards are reflection or transmission standards and can be connected to arbitrary analyzer ports.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
THRough ...
LINE2
Standard types: Through, Open, Short, Match, Symmetric Network (NET),
Attenuation (ATT), Reflect, Sliding Match (SLIDe), Line1 (LINE1 and LINE are
synonymous), Line2.
<port_no> Port numbers of the analyzer. For a transmission standard (through, line,
attenuation, symmetric network) the input and output port numbers must be
specified, for reflection standards, only one port number is required.
*RST value
AUTO |
<delay |
phase>
Optional entry of delay time or phase for UTHRough standard:
AUTO The analyzer determines the delay time or phase during the calibration
sweep
<delay or phase> entry of the delay time in ps (for non-dispersive standards) or of
the phase at the start frequency of the sweep in deg (for dispersive standards)
*RST value AUTO
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example: See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO '<file_name>',<port_no>{,<port_no>}
Selects and initiates a one-port or two-port automatic calibration at arbitrary analyzer and cal unit ports.
If the test setup contains a high attenuation the analyzer may fail to detect the cal unit ports
connected to each of its ports. In this case use the extended command
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs.
If several calibration units are connected, use SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess to
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
495
select a unit for the calibration.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
'<file_name>' Name and (possibly) directory of the cal kit file to be used for the
automatic calibration (string parameter):
If nothing is specified (empty string ' '), the default cal kit file
stored in the calibration unit is used. This file is also used in
manual control.
A NWA cal kit file name *.calkit without path denotes a
specific cal kit file stored in the Calibration Unit.
A NWA cal kit file name *.calkit with path denotes a specific
cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory.
<port_no> Port number(s) of the analyzer. For a 2-port automatic calibration,
either 1, 2 or 2, 1 may be entered. The analyzer automatically
detects the calibration unit ports connected to each analyzer port.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:AUTO '', 1, 2
Perform an automatic 2-port TOSM calibration using the calibration
unit's default calibration kit file and arbitrary test ports of the cal unit.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT '<file_name>'
Generate a cal kit file with the specified name containing the cal kit data of the active calibration unit
(SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess). The cal kit file can be stored in the calibration unit
or written to a directory on the analyzer.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel (not relevant for this
command).
'<file_name>' Name and (possibly) directory of the created cal kit file (string
parameter, extension *.calkit):
If no path and directory is specified, the file is stored in the
calibration unit (see also
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO). The factory
calibration data on the unit is not overwritten.
If a path and directory is specified, the file is stored in the
directory on the analyzer's hard disk.
The default directory (MMEMory:CDIRectory) is not used.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:AUTO:CKIT 'AutoCalChar.calkit'
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
496
Generate a cal kit file AutoCalChar.calkit for the active calibration unit
and store it internally.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs
'<file_name>',<analyzer_port_no>,<cal_unit_port_no>{,<analyzer_port_no>,<cal_u
nit_port_no>}
Selects and initiates a one-port or two-port automatic calibration at arbitrary analyzer and calibration unit
ports.
This command is necessary if the analyzer fails to detect the cal unit ports connected to each of its
ports (e.g. because of a high attenuation in the test setup). If auto-detection works you can use the simpler
command [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
'<file_name>' Name and (possibly) directory of the cal kit file to be used for
the automatic calibration (string parameter):
If nothing is specified (empty string ' '), the default cal
kit file stored in the calibration unit is used. This file
should be used to operate the calibration unit like in
manual control; specifying another cal kit file is
primarily for service purposes.
A NWA cal kit file name *.calkit without path denotes a
specific cal kit file stored in the Calibration Unit.
A NWA cal kit file name *.calkit with path denotes a
specific cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory.
<analyzer_port_no> Port number(s) of the analyzer. For a 2-port automatic
calibration, either 1, 2 or 2, 1 may be entered.
<cal_unit__port_no> Port number(s) of the cal unit. For a 2-port automatic
calibration, either 1, 2 or 2, 1 may be entered. It is possible to
combine arbitrary (not necessarily matching) pairs of analyzer
and cal unit ports.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:AUTO:PORT '', 1, 2, 2, 1
Perform an automatic 2-port TOSM calibration at the analyzer
test ports 1 and 2 using the calibration unit's default calibration
kit file and ports 2 and 1 of the cal unit.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection?
Returns the assignment between the network analyzer ports and the ports of the connected automatic
calibration unit.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
497
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel (not relevant for this
command).
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only
Example:
CORR:COLL:AUTO:PORT '', 1, 2, 2, 1
Perform an automatic 2-port TOSM calibration at the analyzer test ports
1 and 2 using the calibration unit's default calibration kit file and ports 2
and 1 of the cal unit.
CORR:COLL:AUTO:PORT:CONN?
Query the actual port assignment. If the cal unit is properly connected
according to the previous command, the response is 1,2,2,1. A zero
would mean that the corresponding analyzer port is not connected to any
port of the calibration unit.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no> N50FEMALE |
N50MALE | N75FEMALE | N75MALE | PC7 | PC35FEMALE | PC35MALE |
PC292FEMALE | PC292MALE
Additional parameters (): UFEMALE1 | UMALE1 | UFEMALE2 | UMALE2
Selects a connector type at a specified port <port_no> and its gender.
Use [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SCONnection<port_no> to select an arbitrary
connector type using a string variable.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
<port_no> Port numbers of the analyzer.
Note: If the analyzer is set to use the same connectors at all ports
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no>:PORTs
ALL), then a change of a connector type is valid for all ports. The gender of the
connectors can still be different.
Parameters Connector type and gender of the connectors (omitted for query). UFEMALE1 and
UMALE1 denote the user-defined connector type UserConn1, UFEMALE2 and
UMALE2 denote the user-defined connector type UserConn2. The user-defined
connector types must be defined before being addressed by
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no>.
*RST value N50FEMALE for all ports.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
*RST; CORR:COLL:CONN1 N75MALE; CONN4?
Change the connector type at port 1 from N50FEMALE to N75MALE. The connector
type at the other ports is also changed to N75, however, the gender (female) is
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
498
maintained. CORR:COLL:CONN4? returns N75FEMALE.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:PORTs ALL | SINGle
Qualifies whether the connector types at the analyzer ports (but not their gender) are equal or
independent.
In the present firmware version, a calibration must be performed using the same connector type at all
ports. Use [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no>:PORTs SINGle if you want
to perform a measurement with independent port connectors.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
Parameters ALL: Equal (uniform) connector types. If the connector type at one port is
changed, the connector type at all other ports is changed accordingly.
SINGle: Independent (possibly non-uniform) connector types at the ports.
<port_no> Port numbers of the analyzer. This parameter has no effect because the setting
affects all ports.
*RST value ALL
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
CORR:COLL:CONN:PORTS SING
Select independent connector types at the ports.
CORR:COLL:CONN1 N50MALE; CONN4 N75FEMALE; CONN2?
Select independent connector types at ports 1 and 4. The connector type at port
2 is not changed; the query returns N50FEMALE.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete ['<cal_name>']
Deletes system error correction data generated and stored previously.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
'<cal_name>' Name of the calibration (string parameter) defined together with calibration type
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine. If nothing is specified
the analyzer deletes the last system error correction stored by means of
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:METH:DEF 'Test',RSHort,1
Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type.
CORR:COLL:SEL SHOR,1
Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of
this standard.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
499
CORR:COLL:SAVE; DEL
Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active channel,
then delete the data.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod REFL1 | REFL2 | REFL12 | FTRans |
RTRans | FRTRans | FOPort1 | FOPort2 | FOPort12 | FOPTport | ROPTport | TPORt
| TOSM
Selects a one-port or two-port calibration type at ports 1/2.
Use the generalized command [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine to select
the calibration type for arbitrary analyzer ports or a multiport calibration type.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
Parameters Calibration types: Normalization (REFL1, REFL2 and REFL12 for one-port
normalization, FTRans, RTRans and FRTRans for forward, reverse, and bidirectional
two-port/transmission normalization), Full One Port, One Path Two Port (FOPTport
and ROPTport are equivalent, the query returns OPT12), TOSM. T
The numbers in the parameters denote the analyzer ports. Parameters for two-port
calibration types contain no numbers because the command is only valid for ports 1
and 2.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed (with device-specific calibration types), command or query. If several
calibration types are assigned to channel <Ch>, the query returns a list of all
calibration types.
Example: See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine '<cal_name>', REFL |
RSHort | FOPort | FTRans | RTRans | FRTRans | OPTPort | TOSM,
<port_no>[,<port_no>]
Selects a one-port or two-port calibration type at arbitrary analyzer ports.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
'<cal_name>' Name of the calibration (string parameter). The name serves as a reference to
delete a particular set of system correction data
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete).
Parameters Calibration types: One-port Normalization (reflection), using an open (REFL) or a
short (RSHort) standard, Full One Port, Two-port Normalization (FTRans, RTRans
and FRTRans for forward, reverse, and bidirectional two-port/transmission
normalization), One Path Two Port, TOSM, .
<port_no> Port numbers of the analyzer. For an n-port calibration type (n = 1 to 2), n port
numbers must be specified. If more than n numbers are defined, the spare numbers
(the last ones in the list) are ignored. Entering less than n numbers causes an error
message.
*RST value
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
500
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query. Use [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod?
to obtain a list of all calibration types for channel <Ch>.
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE
Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired one or two-port measurement results
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]), stores them and applies them to the calibrated
channel <Ch>. To avoid incompatibilities, older system error correction data is deleted unless it has been
transferred into a cal pool (MMEMory:STORe:CORRection <Ch>, '<file_name>').
This command is the ZVR-compatible equivalent of
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected. It must be used in combination with the ZVR-
compatible commands for calibration method and standard selection; see example below.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:METH REFL1
Select a one-port normalization at port 1 as calibration type.
CORR:COLL OPEN1
Measure an open standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement
results of this standard.
CORR:COLL:SAVE
Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active
channel.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:DEFault
Generates a set of default system error correction data for the selected ports and calibration type. The
default data set corresponds to a test setup which does not introduce any systematic errors; none of the
measurement results acquired previously ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]) is
taken into account.
The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction
which you can replace with your own, external correction data. You may have acquired the external data
in a previous session or even on an other instrument. If you want to use the external correction data on
the analyzer, simply generate the default data set corresponding to your port configuration and calibration
type and overwrite the default data. For details refer to the program example below.
This command must be used in combination with the ZVR-compatible commands
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod and [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATa. Use
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault if you want to use ZVL-specific calibration
commands or if you want to calibrate more than 2 ports.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
501
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:METH REFL1
Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with an open standard as calibration type.
CORR:COLL:SAVE:DEF
Calculate a dummy system error correction for the normalization at port 1. The
dummy system error correction provides the reflection tracking error term
'SCORR3'.
CORR:DATA? 'SCORR3'
Query the dummy system error correction term. The response is a 1 (written as 1,0
for the real and imaginary part) for each sweep point (no attenuation and no phase
shift between the analyzer and the calibration plane).
CORR:DATA 'SCORR3',<ASCII_data>
Replace the dummy system error correction term with your own correction data,
transferred in ASCII format.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected
Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired measurement results
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected), stores them and applies them to
the calibrated channel <Ch>. To avoid incompatibilities, older system error correction data is deleted
unless it has been transferred into a cal pool (MMEMory:STORe:CORRection <Ch>,
'<file_name>').
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:METH:DEF 'Test',RSHort,1
Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration
type.
CORR:COLL:SEL SHOR,1
Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement
results of this standard.
CORR:COLL:SAVE:SEL
Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active
channel.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
502
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault
Generates a set of default system error correction data for the selected ports and calibration type. The
default data set corresponds to a test setup which does not introduce any systematic errors; none of the
measurement results acquired previously
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected) is taken into account.
The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction
which you can replace with your own, external correction data. You may have acquired the external data
in a previous session or even on an other instrument. If you want to use the external correction data on
the analyzer, simply generate the default data set corresponding to your port configuration and calibration
type and overwrite the default data. For details refer to the program example below.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example:
CORR:COLL:METH:DEF 'Test',RSHort,1
Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type.
CORR:COLL:SAVE:SEL:DEF
Calculate a dummy system error correction for the normalization at port 1. The
dummy system error correction provides the reflection tracking error term
'REFLTRACK'.
CORR:CDAT? 'REFLTRACK',1,0
Query the dummy system error correction term. The response is a 1 (written as 1,0
for the real and imaginary part) for each sweep point (no attenuation and no phase
shift between the analyzer and the calibration plane).
CORR:CDAT 'REFLTRACK',1,0,<ASCII_data>
Replace the dummy system error correction term with your own correction data,
transferred in ASCII format.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SCONnection<port_no> '<conn_name>',
MALE | FEMale
Selects a connector type at a specified port <port_no> and its gender. In contrast to
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONnection<port_no>, this command uses a string variable
to identify the connector type.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
<port_no> Port numbers of the analyzer.
Note: If the analyzer is set to use the same connectors at all ports
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no>:PORTs
ALL), then a change of a connector type is valid for all ports. The gender of the
connectors can still be different.
Parameters Connector type (string parameter) and gender of the connectors. The gender
designation MALE | FEMale is not necessary (and ignored) for sexless connector
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
503
types.
*RST value 'N 50 Ohm',FEM for all ports.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
Example:
*RST; CORR:COLL:SCON1 'N 75 Ohm', MALE; SCON4?
Change the connector type at port 1 from 'N 50 Ohm', FEM to 'N 75 Ohm', MALE.
The connector type at the other ports is also changed to N 75 Ohm, however, the
gender (female) is maintained. CORR:COLL:SCON4? returns 'N 75 Ohm', FEM.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection '<conn_name>', TEM | WGUide, GENDer
| NGENder, <perm_rel>, <imped>
Configures the user-defined connector types.
<Ch> Channel number
'<conn_name>' Name of the user-defined connectors, string parameter
TEM | WGUide Transverse electric or waveguide type propagation mode
GENDer | NGENder Polar connector type (m/f)
Sexless connector type
<perm_rel> Relative permittivity
Range [def. unit] 0.0000000001 to 1000. [] UP/DOWN/MIN/MAX parameters are not
available for this command
*RST value
<imped> For TEM type connectors: reference impedance in V (without unit),
For WGUide type connectors: cutoff frequency in Hz (without unit)
Range [def. unit] Ref. impedance: 1 to 1000 MV
Cutoff frequency: 0 Hz to 1000 GHz
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: CORR:CONN 'USERCON',TEM,GEND,1.00000,50
Define a TEM type connector type names USERCON.
CORR:CONN? 'USERCON'
Query the properties of the configured connector type.
CORR:CONN:DEL 'USERCON'
Delete the configured connector type.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete '<conn_name>'
Deletes a user-defined connector type named '<conn_name>'.
<Ch> Channel number
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
504
'<conn_name>' Name of the user-defined connectors, string parameter
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA 'SCORR1' | ... | 'SCORR12'
Writes or reads system error correction data for a specific channel <Ch> and calibration method
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod). The analyzer test ports 1 or 2 are implicitly specified with
the correction terms. The setting command can be used to transfer user-defined correction data to the
analyzer; the query returns the current correction data set. ASCII or block data can be transferred,
depending on the selected data transfer format (FORMat[:DATA]).
The sweep must be stopped to transfer calibration data; see program example for
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:DEFault.
Use the generalized command [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CDATa to transfer calibration
data for arbitrary analyzer ports.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to
1.
Error term
parameters
String parameters describing the different error terms, depending on the current
calibration method; see table below. Each term contains one complex value (real and
imaginary part) for each sweep point.
Range [def.
unit]
The error terms consist of dimensionless complex numbers. The parameters must be
transferred in full length and have the following meaning:
'SCORR1' Directivity at port 1
'SCORR2' Source match at port 1
'SCORR3' Reflection tracking at port 1
'SCORR4' Forward isolation between port 1 and port 2
'SCORR5' Load match at port 2
'SCORR6' Forward transmission tracking between port 1 and port 2
'SCORR7' Directivity at port 2
'SCORR8' Source match at port 2
'SCORR9' Reflection tracking at port 2
'SCORR10' Reverse isolation between port 2 and port 1
'SCORR11' Load match at port 1
'SCORR12' Reverse transmission tracking between port 2 and port 1
*RST value
The analyzer provides a default calibration corresponding to a test setup which does
not introduce any systematic errors; see
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:DEFault.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:DEFault.
The different calibration types of the analyzer provide the following error terms:
Calibration type Parameter in Available error terms (depending
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
505
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod on port numbers)
One-port normalization
(reflection) using an open
standard
REFL1
REFL2
REFL12
'SCORR3'
'SCORR9'
'SCORR3' and 'SCORR9'
Full one port FOPort1
FOPort2
FOPort12
'SCORR1' to 'SCORR3'
'SCORR7' to 'SCORR9'
'SCORR1' to 'SCORR3' and
'SCORR7' to 'SCORR9'
Two-port normalization FTRans
RTRans
FRTRans
'SCORR6'
'SCORR12'
'SCORR6' and 'SCORR12'
One path two port FOPTport
ROPTport
'SCORR1' to 'SCORR3', 'SCORR6'
'SCORR7' to 'SCORR9',
'SCORR12'
TOSM TOSM 'SCORR1' to 'SCORR12'
(at present the isolation terms
'SCORR4' and 'SCORR10' are not
included)
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter?
Returns the sweep settings of the active system error correction for channel <Ch>.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
Response Five values, corresponding to the start and stop frequency of the calibration
sweep, the number of points, the source power, and the sweep type (LIN | LOG |
SEGM).
*RST value (the command generates an execution error if no system error correction is
active)
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATE?
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATE?
Returns the date and time when the active system error correction data for channel <Ch> was acquired.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
*RST value (the command generates an execution error if no system error correction is active)
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only
Example:
CORR:COLL:METH REFL1
Select a one-port normalization at port 1 as calibration type.
CORR:COLL OPEN1
Measure an open standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results
of this standard.
CORR:COLL:SAVE
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
506
Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active channel.
CORR:DATE?
Query the time when the system error correction became active. The analyzer
returns the data and time, e.g. '03/20/06,18:30:39'.
CORR:DATA:PAR?
Query the sweep settings for the calibration sweep. The analyzer returns the start
and stop frequency, the number of points, source power, and the sweep type, e.g.
300000,8000000000,201,0,LIN.
CORR:SST?
Query the calibration status. The analyzer returns 'CAL OFF' (because the
performed one-port calibration is not sufficient for the measured transmission S-
paramter S
21
).
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:AUTO ONCE
Defines the offset parameter for the active test port such that the residual delay of the active trace (defined
as the negative derivative of the phase response) is minimized across the entire sweep range.
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel.
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer. This numeric suffix is ignored; the active port is
determined by the active trace.
ONCE Applies the Auto Length function.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example: *RST; CORR:EDEL:AUTO ONCE
Reset the instrument and apply the auto length function to the default trace
(Trc1 in channel 1).
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:DIELectric <permittivity>
Defines the permittivity for the offset correction at test port <port_no>.
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<permittivity> Permittivity
Range [def. unit] 1 to +1E+6 []
*RST value 1.00062 []
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
507
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:DISTance <length>
Defines the offset parameter for test port <port_no> as a mechanical length.
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<length> Mechanical length
Range [def. unit] 3.402823466E+038 m to +3.4028234664E+038 m.
*RST value 0 m [m or foot (ft), depending on the Distance Unit selected in the System
Configuration dialog]
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth <length>
Defines the offset parameter for test port <port_no> as an electrical length.
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<length> Electrical length
Range [def.
unit]
1E+9 m to +1E+9 m [m or foot (ft), depending on the Distance Unit selected in the
System Configuration dialog]. The increment (UP, DOWN) is 1 mm.
*RST value 0 m
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: CORR:EDEL2:ELEN 0.3
Define an electrical length of 30 cm for channel 1 and port no. 2.
CORR:EDEL2:DIST?; DIEL?
Query the values of the mechanical length and the permittivity at port 2. The
mechanical length is equal to the electrical length divided by the square root of the
permittivity; the latter is set to its default value. The response is
0.29990704322;1.00062.
CORR:EDEL2?
Query the value of the delay at port 2. The delay is equal to the electrical length
divided by the speed of light in the vacuum, so the response is 1.0006922856E-009.
CORR:LOSS2 2; LOSS2:FREQ 1.5 GHz; OFFS 3 dB
Define the offset loss parameters at port 2.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>[:TIME] <delay>
Defines the offset parameter for test port <port_no> as a delay time.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
508
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<delay> Delay
Range [def. unit] -3.40282346638529E+038 s to +3.40282346638529E+038 s [s].
*RST value 0 s
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:FACTory[:STATe] <Boolean>
Enables or disables the factory calibration for a particular channel.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel
<Boolean> Enable or disable factory calibration
*RST value ON
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: *RST; CORR:FACT?
Reset the instrument and query whether the factory calibration for channel 1 is
enabled. The response is 1.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no> <ref_loss>
Defines the offset loss at the reference frequency
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:FREQuency).
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<ref_loss> Frequency-dependent part of the offset loss
Range [def. unit] -200 dB to +200 dB [dB]. The increment (UP/DOWN) is 0.001 dB.
*RST value 0 dB
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:AUTO ONCE
Defines the offset parameters for the active test port such that the residual delay of the active trace
(defined as the negative derivative of the phase response) is minimized and the measured loss is
reproduced as far as possible across the entire sweep range.
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
509
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer. This numeric suffix is ignored; the active port is
determined by the active trace.
ONCE Applies the Auto Length and Loss function.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query
Example: *RST; CORR:LOSS:AUTO ONCE
Reset the instrument and apply the Auto Length and Loss function to the
default trace (Trc1 in channel 1).
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:FREQuency <ref_frequency>
Defines the reference frequency for the frequency-dependent part of the offset loss
([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet).
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<ref_frequency> Reference frequency
Range [def. unit] Frequency range of the analyzer model [Hz]. The increment (UP/DOWN) is
1 MHz.
*RST value 1000000000 Hz (= 1 GHz)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet <DC_loss>
Defines the frequency-independent part (DC value) of the offset loss.
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<DC_loss> Frequency-independent part of the offset loss
Range [def. unit] -200 dB to +200 dB [dB]. The increment (UP/DOWN) is 0.001 dB.
*RST value 0 dB
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<port_no>[:STATe] <Boolean>
Resets the offset parameters for all test ports to zero or queries whether any of the offset parameters are
different from zero.
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
510
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer. This numeric suffix is ignored; the command
affects the parameters of all ports.
<Boolean> The parameter function depends on whether the command is used as a setting
command or as a query:
For setting command:
ON no effect
OFF resets all length offsets to zero
For query:
1 at least one length offset is different from zero
0 all length offsets are zero
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: *RST; CORR:OFFS?
Reset the instrument and query whether the length offset parameters have
been reset as well. The response is 0.
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<port_no>:MAGNitude <DC_loss>
Defines the frequency-independent part (DC value) of the offset loss.
Use the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>... commands to define the complete set of
loss offset parameters. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<port_no>:MAGNitude is equivalent to
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet
<Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel
<port_no> Port number of the analyzer
<DC_loss> Frequency-independent part of the offset loss
Range [def. unit] -200 dB to +200 dB [dB]. The increment (UP/DOWN) is 0.001 dB.
*RST value 0 dB
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:SSTate?
Returns the state of the active system error correction for channel <Ch>.
<Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel.
Response Sting variable containing the calibration state label in the trace list ('Cal', 'Cai',
'Ca?', 'Cav', 'Cal Off').
*RST value '' (empty string)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, query only
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATE?
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
511
[SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection[:STATe] <Boolean>
Enables or disables the system error correction for channel <Ch>.
<Ch> Calibrated channel number
<Boolean> Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the correction.
*RST value ON []
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example: *RST; CORR?
Reset the instrument and query whether channel 1 is system error corrected.
The response is 1.
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency...
This subsystem sets frequency-related parameters, especially the measurement and display ranges for
the different sweep types.
The frequency ranges for the different instrument models are listed below. The specified frequency ranges
start at 9 kHz; see data sheet.
R&S ZVL3 and R&S ZVL3-75 R&S ZVL6 R&S ZVL13
Start, Stop 10 Hz to 3 GHz 10 Hz to 6 GHz 5 kHz to 15 GHz
The stop freq. is preset to 13.6 GHz;
see data sheet
Center > 10 Hz to < 3 GHz > 10 Hz to < 6 GHz > 5 kHz to < 15 GHz
Span 10 Hz to 2.99999999 GHz 10 Hz to 5.99999999 GHz 10 Hz to 14.99999999 GHz
Note: The sweep range can be defined alternatively by a combination of Start/Stop frequencies or a
Center frequency and Span.
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CENTer <center_frequency>
Defines the center of the measurement and display range for a frequency sweep.
<Ch> Channel number. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
<center_frequency> Center frequency of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz]. The increment (parameters UP or
DOWN) is 0.1 kHz.
*RST value Center of the analyzer's default frequency range: (fstart + fstop)/2
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:RAT B1, A2"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1/A2 as measured
parameter for channel and trace no. 1.
FREQ:CENT 100MHz
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
512
Set center frequency to 100 MHz.
FREQ:SPAN 50000
Set frequency span to 50 kHz.
The measurement range defined by means of the center frequency and the current span
([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN) must not exceed the allowed frequency range of the analyzer.
If necessary, the span is reduced to min (Center fMIN, fMAX Center).
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MODE SWEep | SEGMent
Selects the sweep type and defines which set of commands controls the stimulus frequency.
The command [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE provides a complete list of sweep types.
<Ch> Channel number.
SWEep Linear or logarithmic frequency sweep, depending on the selected spacing
([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic). The frequency
range is set via [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STARt etc.
SEGMent Segmented frequency sweep. The sweep range is composed of several continuous
frequency ranges or single frequency points defined by means of the commands in
the [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... subsystem.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed (with device-specific *RST value and parameters), command or query.
Example:
FREQ:MODE SWE
Activate a frequency sweep.
SWE:TYPE LOG
Set the sweep type Log Frequency.
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN <span>
Defines the width of the measurement and display range for a frequency sweep.
<Ch> Channel number.
<span> Frequency span of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz]. The increment (parameters UP or
DOWN) is 0.1 kHz.
*RST value Default stop value (depending on the analyzer model) minus default start value
(9 kHz); fstart fstop.
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:RAT B1, A2"
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
513
Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1/A2 as measured parameter
for channel and trace no. 1.
FREQ:CENT 100MHz
Set center frequency to 100 MHz.
FREQ:SPAN 50000
Set frequency span to 50 kHz, leaving the center frequency unchanged.
Note: The measurement range defined by means of the span and the current center frequency
([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CENTer), must not exceed the allowed frequency range of the
analyzer. If necessary, the center frequency is adjusted to fMIN + Span/2 or fMAX Span/2.
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STARt <start_frequency>
Defines the start frequency for a frequency sweep which is equal to the left edge of a Cartesian diagram.
<Ch> Channel number.
<start_frequency> Start frequency of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz]. The increment (parameters UP or
DOWN) is 0.1 kHz.
*RST value 9 kHz (larger than the minimum frequency of the analyzer).
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query.
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:RAT B1, A2"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1/A2 as measured
parameter for channel and trace no. 1.
FREQ:STAR 100000
Set start frequency to 100 kHz.
FREQ:STOP 10MHz
Set stop frequency to 10 MHz.
Note: If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency
([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STOP), the stop frequency is set to the start frequency plus the
minimum frequency span ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN).
[SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STOP <stop_frequency>
Defines the stop frequency for a frequency sweep which is equal to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram.
<Ch> Channel number.
<stop_frequency> Stop frequency of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz]. The increment (parameters UP or
DOWN) is 0.1 kHz.
*RST value Maximum frequency of the analyzer: MAX
SCPI, Command Confirmed, command or query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
514
Types
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:RAT B1, A2"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1/A2 as measured
parameter for channel and trace no. 1.
FREQ:STAR 100000
Set start frequency to 100 kHz.
FREQ:STOP 10MHz
Set stop frequency to 10 MHz.
Note: If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency
([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STARt), the start frequency is set to the stop frequency minus the
minimum frequency span ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN).
[SENSe<Chn>:]FUNCtion...
This subsystem selects the sweep type and the measurement parameter.
[SENSe<Chn>:]FUNCtion[:ON] '<string>'
Defines the sweep type and the measurement parameter in a single string.
Note: To select a measurement parameter without changing the sweep type, use
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure. Use the other commands in the
CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter... subsystem to create or delete traces and select measurement
parameters.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. If
[SENSe<Chn>:]FUNCtion[:ON] is not used as a query, the number must be 1.
'<string>' Single string parameter defining the sweep type and the parameter to be
measured: <string> = "<sweep_type>:<parameter>".
Range [def. unit] See list of strings below [].
*RST value "XFR:S21" '
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF "Ch4Tr1", "S11"
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection
coefficient S11. The trace automatically becomes the active trace.
SENS4:FUNC?
Check (query) the sweep type and measurement parameter of the active trace.
The result is 'XFR:POW:S11'.
The following keyword defines the sweep type (see SCPI command reference: presentation layer):
XFRequency Frequency sweep (Lin. Frequency/Log. Frequency/Segmented Frequency)
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
515
The following keywords define the measurement parameter (see SCPI command reference: function
name):
POWer:S<Ptout><Ptin> S-parameter with output and input port number of the DUT, e.g. S11, S21.
POWer:KFACtor
POWer:MUFactor<1|2>
Stability factor K
Stability factors 1 or 2
[SENSe<Ch>:]POWer...
This subsystem controls the power at the input ports of the analyzer.
[SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation ARECeiver | BRECeiver, <numeric_value>
Sets an attenuation factor for the received waves b
1
and b
2
.
<Ch> Channel number. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
ARECeiver |
BRECeiver |
Test port of the analyzer:
Test port 1
Test port 2
<numeric_value> Attenuation factor for the received wave.
Range [def. unit] 0 dB to 30 dB. UP and DOWN increment/decrement the attenuation in 5 dB
steps. The analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum
attenuation to the closest step.
*RST value +10 dB (0 dB for R&S ZVL13)
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
POW:ATT AREC, 15
Set an attenuation factor of 15 dB for the waves received at test port 1 and
channel no. 1. The other test ports and channels are not affected.
[SENSe<Ch>:]ROSCillator...
This subsystem controls the frequency reference oscillator.
[SENSe<Ch>:]ROSCillator[:SOURce] INTernal | EXTernal
Selects the source of the reference oscillator signal.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored in the ROSCillator subsystem and can be
set to any value.
INTernal Select internal 10 MHz reference oscillator.
EXTernal Select external reference clock. The frequency of the external reference clock is
specified via [SENSe<Chn>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.
*RST value INTernal
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
516
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example: ROSC EXT
Select external reference oscillator.
ROSC:EXT:FREQ?
Query the frequency of the external reference oscillator. The response is 10000000
Hz, i.e. the frequency of the external reference oscillator must be 10 MHz.
[SENSe<Ch>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <numeric_value>
Specifies or queries the frequency of the external reference oscillator.
<Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored in the ROSCillator subsystem and
can be set to any value.
<numeric_value> Frequency of the external reference clock signal. The frequency must be 10
MHz; any other setting is ignored.
Range [def. unit] 10 MHz [Hz].
*RST value 10 MHz
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
See [SENSe<Ch>:]ROSCillator[:SOURce].
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>...
This subsystem defines all channel settings for a Segmented Frequency sweep. A segmented sweep is
activated via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TPYE SEGMent.
The commands in the [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... subsystem do not accept the step
parameters UP and DOWN. Numeric values can be entered directly or using the DEFault,
MINimum, MAXimum parameters.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:ADD
Inserts a new sweep segment using default channel settings (Insert New Segment). The added segment
covers the frequency interval between the maximum frequency of the existing sweep segments and the
stop frequency of the entire sweep range.
Use [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert to create a segment with specific channel settings.
<Ch> Channel number. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
<Seg> Sweep segment number. Segment numbers must be sequential. If n segments
already exist, the added segment must have the segment number n+1.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Device-specific, no query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
517
Types
Example:
SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ
Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5 MHz.
SEGM2:ADD
Create a second sweep segment. The frequency range of the second segment
will be between 1.5 MHz and the maximum frequency of the analyzer.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:ATTenuation<port_no> <Attenuation>
Defines the attenuation factors for the received waves b
1
and b
2
in segment no. <Seg>. .
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<port_no> Test port number of the analyzer, 1 (wave b
1
) or 2 (wave b
2
). If unspecified the
numeric suffix is set to 1.
<Attenuation> Attenuation factor for the received wave.
Range [def. unit] 0 dB to +30 dB. UP and DOWN increment/decrement the attenuation in 5 dB
steps. The analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum attenuation
to the closest step.
*RST value +10 dB
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, with query.
Example:
SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ
Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5 MHz.
SEGM:ATT1 5; ATT2 15
Define an input attenuation of 5 dB for the b
1
wave, 15 dB for the b
2
wave.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution] <Bandwidth>
Defines the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer (Meas Bandwidth) in sweep segment no. <Seg>. At the
same time, the command activates separate bandwidth setting in all sweep segments
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:CONTrol ON).
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Bandwidth> Internal source power.
Range [def. unit] 1.0E-6 Hz to 5 MHz [Hz]. UP and DOWN increment/decrement the bandwidth in
1-2-5 steps for each decade. The analyzer rounds up any entered value between
these steps and rounds down values exceeding the maximum bandwidth.
*RST value 10 kHz
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
518
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and
thus 10 kHz measurement bandwidth.
SEGM:BWID 1 MHZ
Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:CONTrol <Boolean>
Qualifies whether or not the Meas Bandwidth can be set independently for each sweep segment.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Boolean> ON: The bandwidth can be set independently for each sweep segment.
OFF: The bandwidth in all sweep segments is equal to the bandwidth for
unsegmented sweeps set via SENSe<Ch>:BWIDth[:RESolution].
*RST value OFF. The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a bandwidth is entered
using [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution].
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and thus
10 kHz measurement bandwidth.
SEGM:BWID 1 MHZ
Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz.
SEGM:BWID:CONT OFF
Couple the bandwidths in all segments and reset the bandwidth in segment no. 1 to
the initial value.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect FAST | NORMal
Defines the Filter Type (selectivity) in sweep segment no. <Seg>. At the same time, the command
activates separate filter type settings in all sweep segments
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]SELect:CONTrol ON).
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
FAST Use IF filter with normal selectivity and short settling time.
NORMal Use IF filter with higher selectivity but larger settling time.
*RST value FAST
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
519
Example:
SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and
thus the Fast filter type.
SEGM:BWID:SEL NORM
Activate an IF filter with high selectivity.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect:CONTrol <Boolean>
Qualifies whether or not the Filter Type (selectivity) can be set independently for each sweep segment.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Boolean> ON The filter type can be set independently for each sweep segment.
OFF The filter type in all sweep segments is equal to the filter type for
unsegmented sweeps set via SENSe<Ch>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect.
*RST value OFF. The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a bandwidth is entered
using [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
*RST; SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and thus
the Fast filter type.
SEGM:BWID:SEL NORM
Change the filter type to Normal.
BWID:SEL?
Query the (default) filter type for unsegmented sweeps. The response is FAST.
SEGM:BWID:SEL:CONT OFF
Couple the filter type in all segments and reset the filter type in segment no. 1 to the
unsegmented value FAST..
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:CLEar
Deletes all sweep segments in the channel. The command is equivalent to
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:DELet:ALL.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:COUNt?
Returns the number of sweep segments in the channel including all segments that are switched off
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] OFF).
<Ch> Channel number.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
520
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, query only.
Example:
SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default
settings.
SEGM OFF
Disable the measurement in the created sweep segment.
SEGM:COUN?
Query the number of segments.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DEFine <Start>,<Stop>,<Points>,<Power>,<Point
Delay>,<Unused>,<Meas. Bandwidth>[,<LO>]
Re-defines a sweep segment with specific channel settings (Insert New Segment). The segment replaces
an existing segment <Seg> in the segment list. The modified segment must not overlap with any of the
existing segments.
Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandatory; no default values are provided. All settings
except <LO> can be changed for existing segments using other commands of the
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... subsystem.
Note: Use [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:Add to create a segment with default channel settings. Use
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert (no query) to insert a new segment into the current
segment list.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number. Segment numbers must be sequential. The specified
segment number must be smaller or equal to the number of existing segments
plus 1.
If segment number <Seg> already exists, it is replaced by the new segment.
<Start>, <Stop> Start and stop frequency of the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt and
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP.
Range [def. unit] A new segment must not overlap with any of the existing segments. Besides the
frequency range depends on the analyzer model. [Hz]
<Points> Number of sweep points in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 2147483647. [1] 1 is allowed if start and stop frequencies are equal.
<Power> Internal source power in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer.
Range [def. unit] 40 dBm to +10 dBm. The exact range depends on the analyzer model; refer to
the data sheet [dBm]. UP and DOWN increment/decrement the source power in
1-dB steps.
<Point Delay> Delay for each partial measurement in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl. In the setting
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert:SELect SWTime, this parameter is
replaced by <Time>. On R&S ZVL13 network analyzers, no point delay can be
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
521
set: the value must be 0.
Range [def. unit] 0 s to 2.5E+003 s. [s] AUTO activates automatic sweep time setting in the
segment, which is equivalent to a meas. delay of 0 s.
<Unused> Ignored parameter, should be set to the default value 0.
<Meas.
Bandwidth>
Resolution bandwidth in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution].
Range [def. unit] 1.0E-6 Hz to 5 MHz [Hz].
<LO> Position of the local oscillator frequency LO relative to the RF frequency (Spur
Avoid). In remote control this parameter must be set when a sweep segment is
created.
Range [def. unit] POSitive: LO > RF
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, with query (used to retrieve the channel settings for a particular
sweep segment).
Example:
SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings.
SEGM:DEF?
Query the channel settings for the new segment.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete
Deletes the specified (single) sweep segment (Del. Selected Segment).
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete:ALL deletes all segments in the channel.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number. If unspecified, the value is set to 1.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and
thus NORMal selectivity.
SEGM:DEL
Delete the created segment.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:DELete:ALL
Deletes all sweep segments in the channel (Del. All Segments). [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete
deletes a single segment.
<Ch> Channel number.
*RST value
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
522
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings
and thus NORMal selectivity.
SEGM:ALL
Delete the created segment and all segments in the channel created before.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer?
Returns the center frequency of sweep segment no. <Seg>.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
Response Center frequency of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz].
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device specific, query only.
Example:
SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ
Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5
MHz.
SEGM:FREQ:CENT?
Query the center frequency of the created segment. The response is
1.2500000000E+006.
Note: The frequency range of the sweep segment can be changed via
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt and
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN?
Returns the width of the frequency range of sweep segment no. <Seg>.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
Response Frequency span of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz].
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device specific, query only.
Example:
SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ
Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
523
MHz.
SEGM:FREQ:SPAN?
Query the span of the created segment. The response is
5.0000000000E+005.
Note: The frequency range of the sweep segment can be changed via
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt and
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
Defines the Start frequency of sweep segment no. <Seg>.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Start> Start frequency of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz]. The increment is 0.1 kHz.
*RST value (no sweep segment defined after reset)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ
Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5
MHz.
SEGM:FREQ:STAR?
Query the start frequency of the created segment. The response is
1.0000000000E+006.
Note: If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP), the stop frequency is set to the start
frequency plus the minimum frequency span of 1 Hz.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
Defines the Stop frequency of sweep segment no. <Seg>.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Stop> Stop frequency of the sweep.
Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz]. The increment is 0.1 kHz.
*RST value (no sweep segment defined after reset)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ
Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5
MHz.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
524
SEGM:FREQ:STOP?
Query the stop frequency of the created segment. The response is
1.5000000000E+006.
Note: If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt), the start frequency is set to the stop
frequency minus the minimum frequency span
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN).
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert <Start>,<Stop>,<Points>,<Power>,<Point
Delay>,<Unused>,<Meas. Bandwidth>
Inserts a new sweep segment with specific channel settings (Define Segments - Add). The new segment
must not overlap with any of the existing segments.
Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandatory; no default values are provided. All settings
except <LO> can be changed for existing segments using other commands of the
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... subsystem.
Note: Use [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:Add to create a segment with default channel settings. Use
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DEFine to change or query all settings of an existing segment.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number. Segment numbers must be sequential. The specified
segment number must be smaller or equal to the number of existing segments
plus 1. Moreover, segment numbers must selected such that the corresponding
frequency ranges are in ascending order.
If one or more sweep segments with segment numbers <Seg> or larger exist in
the current channel, then all these existing segment numbers are incremented by
1 and the new segment is inserted as segment no. <Seg>.
<Start>, <Stop> Start and stop frequency of the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt and
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP.
Range [def. unit] A new segment must not overlap with any of the existing segments. Besides the
frequency range depends on the analyzer model. [Hz]
<Points> Number of sweep points in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 2147483647. [1] 1 is allowed if start and stop frequencies are equal.
<Power> Internal source power in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer.
Range [def. unit] 40 dBm to +10 dBm. The exact range depends on the analyzer model; refer to
the data sheet [dBm]. UP and DOWN increment/decrement the source power in
1-dB steps.
<Point Delay> Delay for each partial measurement in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl. In the setting
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert:SELec SWTime, this parameter is
replaced by <Time>. On R&S ZVL13 network analyzers, no point delay can be
set: the value must be 0.
Range [def. unit] 0 s to 2.5E+003 s. [s] AUTO activates automatic sweep time setting in the
segment, which is equivalent to a meas. delay of 0 s.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
525
<Unused> Ignored parameter, should be set to the default value 0.
<Meas.
Bandwidth>
Resolution bandwidth in the segment. See
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution].
Range [def. unit] 1.0E-6 Hz to 5 MHz [Hz].
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, no query.
Example:
SEGM:INS 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.5S, 0, 10KHZ
Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5 MHz.
SEGM2:ADD
Create a second sweep segment. The frequency range of the second segment
will be between 1.5 MHz and the maximum frequency of the analyzer.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:OVERlap <Boolean>
Queries whether the analyzer supports overlapping sweep segments.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Boolean> ON | OFF: No effect.
*RST value OFF. If used as a query, the command returns the information that overlapping
sweep segments are not supported (OFF).
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command (no effect) or query
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:LEVel] <Power>
Defines the Power of the internal signal source in sweep segment no. <Seg>. At the same time, the
command activates separate power control in all sweep segments
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:Level]:CONTrol ON).
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Power> Internal source power.
Range [def. unit] 40 dBm to +10 dBm. The exact range depends on the analyzer model; refer to
the data sheet [dBm].
*RST value 10 dBm.
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and
thus 10 dBm internal source power.
SEGM:POW -20
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
526
Decrease the power to 20 dBm.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:LEVel]:CONTrol <Boolean>
Qualifies whether or not the Power of the internal signal source can be set independently for each sweep
segment.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Boolean> ON: The power can be set independently for each sweep segment.
OFF: The power in all sweep segments is equal to the internal source power for
unsegmented sweeps set via
SOURce<Ch>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude].
*RST value OFF. The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a segment level is
entered using [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:LEVel].
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and thus
10 dBm internal source power.
SEGM:POW -20
Decrease the power to 20 dBm.
SEGM:POW:CONT OFF
Couple the powers in all segments and reset the power in segment no. 1 to the initial
value.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] <Boolean>
Activates or deactivates the sweep segment <Seg>. Sweep points belonging to inactive segments only
are not measured
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Boolean> ON | OFF - Activates or deactivates the measurement in sweep segment
<Seg>.
*RST value ON
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings.
SEGM OFF
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
527
Disable the measurement in the created sweep segment.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl <Meas. Delay>
Defines the delay time for each partial measurement in sweep segment no. <Seg> (Meas. Delay). If
coupling of the segments is switched on ([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl:CONTrol ON)
the delay is valid for all sweep segments in the current channel. This command is not available on R&S
ZVL13 network analyzers.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Meas.
Delay>
Meas. delay before each partial measurement.
Range [def.
unit]
0 s to 2.5E+003 s. [s] Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged
but has an impact on the duration of the sweep
([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:TIME).
*RST value 0 s
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query. This default value corresponds to automatic
sweep time setting in manual control.
Example:
SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings.
SEGM:SWE:DWEL 1 MS
Set the meas. delay in segment no. 1 to 1 ms.
SEGM:DEF? Response: 300000,8000000000,51,-300,0.056559,0,10000,POS,NORM
Query the channel parameters for sweep segment 1. The response value for the
segment sweep time (olive) implicitly contains the defined meas. delay.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl:CONTrol <Boolean>
Qualifies whether or not the Meas. Delay defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl can
be set independently for each sweep segment.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number. This suffix is ignored; the command controls the whole
segmented sweep.
<Boolean> ON: The meas. delay can be set independently for each sweep segment.
OFF: The meas. delay in all sweep segments is equal to the Meas. Delay
measurements for unsegmented sweeps set via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:DWELl.
*RST value OFF. The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a meas. delay time is
entered using [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
528
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings and thus
0 s meas. delay.
SEGM:SWE:DWELl 0.1
Increase the meas. delay to 0.1 s.
SEGM:SWE:DWELl:CONT OFF
Couple the meas. delay in all segments and reset the delay in segment no. 1 to the
initial value of 0 s.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts <Points>
Defines the total number of measurement Points in sweep segment no. <Seg>.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Seg> Sweep segment number.
<Points> Number of points in the segment.
Range [def. unit] 1 to 2147483647. [1] 1 is allowed if start and stop frequencies are equal.
*RST value 51
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example: SEGM:ADD
Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings
and thus 51 sweep points.
SEGM:SWE:POIN 401
Increase the number of points to 401.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep...
This subsystem provides general settings to control the sweep . Most of the settings are related to the
sweep time.
The [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep... settings apply to non-segmented sweep types. Segmented sweeps are
selected via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TPYE SEGMent and configured in the
[SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... subsystem.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt <No_of_Sweeps>
Defines the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous
OFF).
<Ch> Channel number.
<No_of_Sweeps> Number of consecutive sweeps to be measured.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
529
Range [def. unit] 1 to 999. []
*RST value 1
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
See CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep?.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:DWELl <delay>
Defines the Meas. Delay time for each partial measurement. This command is not available on R&S
ZVL13 network analyzers.
<Ch> Channel number.
<delay> Meas. delay before each partial measurement.
Range [def. unit] 0 s to 3.179551E+002 s. [s] Changing the delay leaves the number of points
unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep.
*RST value 0 s
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:S12"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the S-parameter S12 as measured
parameter for channel and trace no. 1.
SWE:TIME?
Query total sweep time.
SWE:DWEL 1
Set a delay of 1 s for each partial measurement.
SWE:TIME?
Query total sweep time. The time is extended by the delay times the total
number of partial measurements per sweep.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:POINts <no_points>
Defines the total number of measurement points per sweep (Number of Points).
<Ch> Channel number 1.
<no_points> Number of points per sweep.
Range [def. unit] 2 to 4001. [1]
*RST value 201
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:S12"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the S-parameter S12 as measured
parameter for channel and trace no. 1.
SWE:TIME?
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
530
Query total sweep time.
SWE:POIN 2010
Multiply the (default) number of points by 10.
SWE:TIME?
Query total sweep time again. The analyzer estimates a sweep time that is
also multiplied by 10.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
Defines the frequency vs. time characteristics of a frequency sweep (Lin Frequency or Log Frequency).
The command has no effect on segmented frequency sweeps.
Note: Use [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TPYE to select sweep types other than Lin Frequency or Log
Frequency.
<Ch> Channel number.
LINear The stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the frequency range.
In a Cartesian diagram, the x-axis is a linear frequency axis.
LOGarithmic The frequency is swept in equidistant steps on a logarithmic scale. In a
Cartesian diagram, the x-axis is a logarithmic frequency axis.
*RST value LINear
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:S12"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the S-parameter S12 as measured
parameter for channel and trace no. 1.
SWE:SPAC LOG
Change to sweep type Log Frequency.
[SENSe<Chn>:]SWEep:SRCPort 1 | 2
Selects a source port for the stimulus signal (Drive Port). The setting acts on the active trace.
If an S-parameter S
<out><in>
is measured, the second port number index <in> (input port of the DUT = drive
port of the analyzer) is set equal to the selected drive port: Drive port selection affects the measured
quantity.
<Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. If unspecified the numeric
suffix is set to 1.
1 ... Test port number of the analyzer, 1 to 2.
*RST value 1 (test port 1)
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, with query.
Example:
CALC4:PAR:SDEF "Ch4Tr1", "A1"
Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wave quantity a1.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
531
The trace automatically becomes the active trace.
SENS4:SWE:SRCP 2
Select drive port 2 for the active trace.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:STEP <step_size>
Sets the distance between two consecutive sweep points.
This setting is valid for sweep types with equidistant sweep points only. It does not apply to
logarithmic and segmented sweeps.
<Ch> Channel number.
<step_size> Stimulus step size.
Range [def.
unit]
Depending on the other channel settings. The minimum step size is equal to the
sweep span divided by the maximum number of points minus one
([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:POINts), the maximum step size is equal to the sweep span
([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN). See also description of manual control and
program example below. []
*RST value The default step size is equal to the default sweep span of the analyzer divided by
the default number of points minus one.
SCPI,
Command
Types
Confirmed, with query.
Example:
*RST; SWE:STEP?
Query the default step size. For a 6 GHz analyzer, the response is 29998500.
29998500 Hz = (6 GHz 300 kHz) / 200.
SWE:STEP UP
Increase the step size.
FREQ:STOP?; :SWE:POIN?
Query the stop frequency of the sweep and the number of points. Increasing the
step size has changed both values.
[SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear | LOGarithmic | SEGMent
Selects the sweep type (frequency) and the position of the sweep points across the sweep range.
<Ch> Channel number.
LINear Lin. frequency sweep at constant source power
(SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]). The
stimulus frequency ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:...) is swept in equidistant steps
over the frequency range. In a Cartesian diagram, the x-axis is a linear frequency
axis.
LOGarithmic Log. frequency sweep. The frequency is swept in equidistant steps on a logarithmic
scale. In a Cartesian diagram, the x-axis is a logarithmic frequency axis.
SEGMent Segmented frequency sweep. The sweep range is composed of several continuous
frequency ranges or single frequency points defined by means of the commands in
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
532
the [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>... subsystem.
*RST value LINear
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
FUNC "XFR:POW:S12"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the S-parameter S12 as measured parameter
for channel and trace no. 1.
SWE:TYPE LOG
Change to sweep type Log Frequency.
SOURce<Ch>:...
This subsystem controls the power of the internal signal source and controls the output signals of the
instrument.
SOURce<numeric_suffix>:EXTernal<numeric_suffix>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]
INTernal | EXTernal
Switches between external and internal reference oscillator.
<numeric_suffix> 1 | 2 - The numeric suffixes are ignored.
INTernal Select internal 10 MHz reference oscillator.
EXTernal Select external reference clock. The frequency of the external reference clock
is specified via [SENSe<Chn>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.
*RST value INT
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SOUR:EXT:ROSC EXT
Switches to external reference oscillator.
SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude] <numeric_value>
Defines the power of the internal signal source (channel power). The setting is valid for all sweep types.
<Ch> Channel number.
<Pt> Test port number of the analyzer. This suffix is ignored because the selected
channel power applies to all source ports used in the active channel.
<numeric_value> Internal source power.
Range [def. unit] 70 dBm to +20 dBm (to 0 dBm for R&S ZVL13 analyzers). The exact range
for all analyzer models is quoted in the data sheet [dBm]. UP and DOWN
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
533
increment/decrement the source power in 0.1-dB steps.
*RST value 10 dBm
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example: FUNC "XFR:POW:RAT B1, A2"
Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1/A2 as measured parameter
for channel and trace no. 1.
SOUR:POW -6
Set the internal source power for channel 1 to -6 dBm.
STATus...
This subsystem controls the Status Reporting System. Note that *RST does not influence the status
registers.
STATus:PRESet
Configures the status reporting system such that device-dependent events are reported at a higher level.
The command affects only the transition filter registers, the ENABle registers, and queue enabling:
The ENABle parts of the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable... registers are set to all
1's.
The PTRansition parts are set all 1's, the NTRansition parts are set to all 0's, so that only positive
transitions in the CONDition part are recognized.
The status reporting system is also affected by other commands, see Reset Values of the Status
Reporting System.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query
Example:
STAT:PRES
Preset the status registers.
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
Returns the contents of the CONDition part of the QUEStionable register. Reading the CONDition
registers is nondestructive.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, query only
Example:
STAT:QUES:COND?
Query the CONDition part of the QUEStionable register to check for
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
534
questionable instrument states.
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle
Sets the enable mask which allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the QUEStionable register to be
reported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to
true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit (bit 3 of the STatus Byte).
<NRf> 0 to 65535 (decimal representation)
*RST value (see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System)
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
STAT:QUES:ENABle 1536
Set bits no. 9 and 10 of the QUEStionable:ENABle register
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
Returns the contents of the EVENt part of the QUEStionable register. Reading an EVENt register clears it.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, query only
Example:
STAT:OPER?
Query the EVENt part of the OPERation register to check whether an event
has occurred since the last reading.
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition
Sets the negative transition filter. Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the
associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event
register.
<NRf> 0 to 65535 (decimal representation)
*RST value (see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System)
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
STAT:QUES:NTR 1536
Set bits no. 9 and 10 of the QUEStionable:NTRansition register
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
535
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition
Sets the positive transition filter. Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the
associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event
register.
<NRf> 0 to 65535 (decimal representation)
*RST value (see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System)
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
STAT:QUES:PTR 1536
Set bits no. 9 and 10 of the QUEStionable:PTRansition register
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:CONDition?
Returns the contents of the CONDition part of the QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register. Reading the
CONDition registers is nondestructive.
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, query only
Example:
STAT:QUES:LIMit:COND?
Query the CONDition part of the QUEStionable:LIMit1 register to retrieve the
current status of the limit check.
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:ENABle
Sets the enable mask which allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>
register to be reported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit
transitions to true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit (bit 10 of the QUEStionable register
for the LIMit1 register, bit 0 of the LIMit1 register for the LIMit2 register).
<NRf> 0 to 65535 (decimal representation)
*RST value (see also Reset Values of the status reporting system)
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
STAT:QUES:LIM2:ENAB 6
Set bits no. 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable:LIMit2:ENABle register
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]?
Returns the contents of the EVENt part of the QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register. Reading an EVENt
register clears it.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
536
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, query only
Example:
STAT:QUES:LIM1?
Query the EVENt part of the QUEStionable:LIMit1 register to check whether an
event has occurred since the last reading.
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:NTRansition
Sets the negative transition filter. Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the
associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event
register.
<NRf> 0 to 65535 (decimal representation)
*RST value (see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System)
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
STAT:QUES:LIM2:NTR 6
Set bits no. 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable:LIMit2:NTRansition register
STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:PTRansition
Sets the positive transition filter. Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the
associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event
register.
<NRf> 0 to 65535 (decimal representation)
*RST value (see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System)
SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query
Example:
STAT:QUES:LIM2:PTR 6
Set bits no. 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable:LIMit2:PTRansition register
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
Queries and at the same time deletes the oldest entry in the error queue. Operation is identical to that of
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
The entry consists of an error number and a short description of the error. Positive error numbers are
instrument-dependent. Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard; see section Error
Messages.
*RST value
SCPI, Command Confirmed, query only
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
537
Types
Example:
STAT:QUE?
Query the oldest entry in the error queue. 0,"No error" is returned if the error
queue is empty.
SYSTem...
This subsystem collects the functions that are not related to instrument performance, such as function for
general housekeeping and function related to global configurations.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL:CONNection THRough | OPEN | SHORt | MATCh,
<port_1>, <port_2>
Connects the selected calibration standard to one or two ports of the active calibration unit (see
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess).
THRough | OPEN |
SHORt | MATCh
Connected one or two-port standard
<port_1> Port number of the calibration unit, for one and two-port
standards
<port_2> Second port number of the calibration unit, for two-port
standards (THRough) only, omitted for the one-port standards
*RST value
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SYST:COMM:AKAL:CONN THR, 1, 2
Connect a trough standard between ports 1 and 2 of the cal
unit.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:AKAL:MMEMory[:STATe] <Boolean>
Shows or hides the memory of the active calibration unit (see
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess).
<Boolean> ON memory is shown in a separate drive
OFF memory is not shown
*RST value OFF
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SYST:COMM:AKAL:MMEM ON
Show the memory of the active calibration unit.
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
538
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <address_no>
Sets the GPIB address of the analyzer.
<address_no> GPIB address (integer number)
Range [def. unit] 0 to 30 [].
*RST value The GPIB address is factory-preset (value 20). *RST has no effect on the
value.
SCPI, Command
Types
Confirmed, command or query
Example:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 10
Set the GPIB address to 10.
*RST; SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR?
After a reset, the address is maintained (the response is 10).
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:RTERminator LFEoi | EOI
Sets the receive terminator of the analyzer. The receive terminator indicates the end of a command or a
data block.
The receive terminator setting is relevant if block data is transferred to the analyzer (FORMat[:DATA]
REAL). In the default setting LFEOI, the analyzer recognizes an LF character sequence with or without the
EOI control bus message as a receive terminator. An accidental LF in a data block can be recognized as a
terminator and cause an interruption of the data transfer.
The EOI setting is especially important if commands are transferred in block data format, because it
ensures that the parser for command decoding is activated by the terminator only after the command has
been completely transferred. Readout of binary data does not require a change of the receive terminator.
LFEoi LF character sequence with or without EOI recognized
EOI EOI recognized only
*RST value LFEoi.
SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI
Set the terminator to EOI.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]?
Queries the name of the next printer installed under Windows XP.
The SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? command should be sent previously to
return to the beginning of the printer list and query the name of the first printer.
The names of other printers can then be queried with the
SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]? command. After all available printer names
have been output, an empty string enclosed by quotation marks (") is output for the next query. Further
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
539
queries are answered by a query error.
*RST value
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL LASER on LPT1
Select printer LASER on LPT1.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess '<cal_unit_name>'
Selects one of the USB-connected calibration units for calibration (see commands
SENSe<Ch>:CORRection:COLLect:AUTO...). This command is not necessary if only one cal unit is
connected.
<cal_unit_name> Name (USB address) of a connected calibration unit (string
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
540
variable). The names of all connected cal units can be queried
using SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess:ALL?
*RST values '' (empty string; *RST has no effect on external devices).
SCPI, Command
Types
Device-specific, command or query
Example:
SYST:COMM:RDEV:AKAL:ADDR:ALL?
Query the names of all connected calibration units.
SYST:COMM:RDEV:AKAL:ADDR 'ZV-Z52::1234'
Select the cal unit named 'ZV-Z52::1234' for calibration.
CORR:COLL:AUTO '', 1, 2, 4
Perform an automatic 3-port TOSM calibration at test ports 1, 2,
and 4 using the calibration unit's default calibration kit file and
arbitrary test ports of the cal unit.
SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess:ALL?
Queries the names (USB addresses) of all connected calibration units.
Response Names (USB addresses) of all connected calibration units (comma-
separated list of string variables).
*RST values '' (empty string; *RST has no effect on external devices).
SCPI,
Command
Types
Device-specific, query only
Example:
See SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess
SYSTem:DATA:SIZE ALL | AUTO
Defines the block size for the data transfer between the instrument hardware and the software. The block
size has an impact on the display of traces and on the readout of trace data using the commands of the
TRACe... or CALCulate<Chn>:DATA... subsystems.
ALL Data transfer with full buffer size. The data for each sweep are transferred together
so that each displayed trace contains the data of exactly one sweep. The same is
true for queried trace data. The trace is displayed or updated at once, the sweep
progress is not visible on the screen.
To make sure that all queried trace points stem from the same sweep you can
also use single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF) and the common
command *OPC?
AUTO Data transfer with an automatically determined block size. In general the data blocks
comprise only part of a trace, therefore the sweep progress is visible on the screen.
On the other hand the displayed trace can show the results of two consecutive
sweeps.
*RST value AUTO
SCPI, Device-specific, command or query
R&S ZVL Command Reference
Instrument-Control Commands
Operating Manual 1303.6580.32-05
541
Command
Types
Example:
SYST:DATA:SIZE ALL
Select data transfer with full buffer size in order to view the trace data from a single
sweep..
SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>
Sets the date for the internal calendar.
<year>,<month>,<day>
Date; the sequence of entry is year, month, day.
Range [def. unit]
1980 to 2099, 1 to 12, 1 to 31.
*RST value